Sony P910a User Manual

This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
P910a  
User Guide  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Contents  
Entering text with the flip closed..................................... 32  
Entering text with the flip open ....................................... 33  
P910a locks...................................................................... 37  
OVERVIEW  
Introduction................................................................. 9  
Getting to know your P910a..................................... 10  
P910a package.................................................................. 10  
P910a overview ................................................................ 11  
SIM card ........................................................................... 12  
Battery .............................................................................. 12  
Care instructions............................................................... 13  
First time start-up.............................................................. 14  
Turning your P910a on and off......................................... 14  
Importing phonebook entries............................................ 14  
Flip closed mode............................................................... 15  
Flip open mode ................................................................. 16  
Flip removed..................................................................... 17  
Screen areas ...................................................................... 18  
Jog Dial ............................................................................ 19  
Keypad functions ............................................................. 20  
Indicators and status bar icons.......................................... 21  
Memory Stick ................................................................... 22  
Connecting the accessories............................................... 24  
Services............................................................................. 25  
Applications - overview.................................................... 25  
Updating the software....................................................... 28  
General functions.............................................................. 28  
Phone.......................................................................... 40  
Call handling with the flip closed.................................... 40  
Call handling with the flip open ...................................... 43  
Handling two or more calls.............................................. 45  
Call list and call log ......................................................... 47  
Hints and smart functions ................................................ 47  
Preferences....................................................................... 52  
MEDIA  
CommuniCorder....................................................... 58  
Recording video clips ...................................................... 58  
Taking pictures ................................................................ 60  
Camera settings................................................................ 62  
Pictures and Image editor........................................ 63  
Pictures ............................................................................ 63  
Image editor ..................................................................... 65  
Video .......................................................................... 67  
Video clips ....................................................................... 67  
Streaming......................................................................... 69  
Preferences....................................................................... 70  
3
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Music player............................................................... 72  
Playing sound files............................................................ 72  
Managing sound files........................................................ 73  
Calendar .................................................................. 107  
Creating calendar entries................................................ 107  
Managing calendar entries ............................................. 108  
Sending and receiving calendar entries.......................... 109  
Preferences..................................................................... 109  
Internet....................................................................... 76  
Using the browser view .................................................... 77  
Preferences........................................................................ 82  
Tasks ........................................................................ 110  
Creating task entries....................................................... 110  
Managing task entries .................................................... 111  
Moving task entries........................................................ 111  
Sending and receiving task entries................................. 112  
Preferences..................................................................... 112  
Games ......................................................................... 84  
Chess................................................................................. 84  
Solitaire............................................................................. 85  
BUSINESS  
Jotter ........................................................................ 113  
Creating and editing notes ............................................. 113  
Drawing pictures............................................................ 114  
Managing notes.............................................................. 114  
Sending and receiving notes .......................................... 114  
Messages..................................................................... 86  
Folders in Messages.......................................................... 87  
The accounts in Messages ................................................ 88  
Handling text messages .................................................... 88  
Handling multimedia messages ........................................ 89  
Handling email.................................................................. 93  
More about messaging...................................................... 97  
TOOLS  
Sound recorder........................................................ 115  
Making sound recordings............................................... 115  
Using sound recordings as ring signals.......................... 116  
Sending sound recordings.............................................. 116  
Contacts.................................................................... 100  
Using Contacts with the flip closed................................ 100  
Using Contacts with the flip open .................................. 102  
Creating and editing contacts.......................................... 103  
Managing contacts.......................................................... 105  
Making an owner card .................................................... 106  
Preferences...................................................................... 106  
Calculator ................................................................ 117  
Time.......................................................................... 118  
Setting time and date...................................................... 118  
Specifying workdays...................................................... 119  
4
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Setting locations ............................................................. 119  
Setting number formats .................................................. 120  
Setting alarms ................................................................. 120  
Synchronization and backup ................................. 139  
Local synchronization.................................................... 139  
Remote synchronization ................................................ 141  
Backing up data ............................................................. 142  
Restoring data ................................................................ 142  
Common viewer and editor functions ............................ 122  
Quickword ...................................................................... 123  
Quicksheet ..................................................................... 123  
Quickpoint ...................................................................... 124  
Pdf+ .............................................................................. 125  
SETTINGS  
Personalizing your P910a....................................... 144  
Themes........................................................................... 144  
Changing your application shortcuts ............................. 144  
Setting a background picture ......................................... 144  
Setting the light intensity ............................................... 144  
Setting a screen saver..................................................... 145  
Adding images to your Contacts.................................... 145  
Ring signals.................................................................... 145  
Alarm tones and sound notification............................... 146  
File manager ............................................................ 126  
Online services......................................................... 128  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS  
PC Suite and Content and Application CDs......... 129  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite.................................................. 129  
Content and Application CD .......................................... 130  
Control panel........................................................... 147  
The Device tab  
Installing applications............................................. 131  
Installing applications on your P910a ............................ 131  
Removing applications from your P910a ....................... 133  
Sony Ericsson Update Service........................................ 133  
Application shortcuts ..................................................... 147  
Display........................................................................... 147  
Flight mode.................................................................... 149  
International................................................................... 149  
Locks.............................................................................. 149  
Sounds and alerts ........................................................... 149  
Text input....................................................................... 151  
Themes........................................................................... 151  
Time & date ................................................................... 152  
Connecting to other devices.................................... 134  
Connection via SyncStation............................................ 134  
Connection via Infrared port........................................... 135  
Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology .............. 136  
5
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
User greeting................................................................... 153  
REFERENCE  
The Connections tab  
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 179  
Bluetooth......................................................................... 153  
Cable............................................................................... 154  
GSM Networks............................................................... 155  
Infrared ........................................................................... 155  
Internet accounts............................................................. 155  
Messaging accounts........................................................ 160  
WAP accounts ................................................................ 165  
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use ................... 185  
Limited warranty............................................................ 187  
FCC Statement............................................................... 189  
Environmental information............................................ 189  
Declaration of Conformity............................................. 189  
Terms and definitions............................................. 190  
Technical data ......................................................... 198  
Index......................................................................... 202  
The Other tab  
Certificate manager......................................................... 166  
Flip settings..................................................................... 167  
Format disk..................................................................... 167  
IP Security manager........................................................ 168  
Language selection ......................................................... 168  
Master reset..................................................................... 168  
Secure tokens.................................................................. 169  
Storage manager ............................................................. 169  
WIM PIN settings........................................................... 170  
Getting started with Internet and Messages......... 172  
Introduction..................................................................... 172  
Automatically set up service provider and messaging ... 173  
Manually set up service provider.................................... 173  
Manually set up messaging............................................. 174  
Setting up WAP accounts ............................................... 175  
Using your P910a as a modem ....................................... 175  
GPRS - connection information...................................... 177  
6
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Sony Ericsson P910a  
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.End-user  
license agreement for SunJavaJ2ME:  
User Guide  
Second edition (December 2004)  
This User Guide is published by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB,  
without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this User Guide necessitated  
by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to  
programs and/or equipment, may be made by Sony Ericsson Mobile  
Communications AB at any time and without notice. Such changes will, however,  
be incorporated into new editions of this User Guide.  
©Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, 2004. All rights reserved.  
Publication number: AE/LZT 162 36 R2A  
The Bluetoothword mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and  
any use of such marks by Sony Ericsson is under license.  
Symbian and all Symbian-based marks and logos are trademarks of Symbian  
Limited.  
1. Restrictions: Software is confidential copyrighted information of Sun and title to  
all copies is retained by Sun and/or its licensors. Customer shall not modify,  
decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract, or otherwise reverse engineer Software.  
Software may not be leased, assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in part.  
2. Export Regulations: Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export  
control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated  
regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries.  
The Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and  
acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export,  
or import Software. Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise exported or  
re-exported (i) into, or to a national or resident of, Cuba, Iraq, Iran, North Korea,  
Libya, Sudan, Syria (as such listing may be revised from time to time) or any  
country to which the U.S. has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S.  
Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nations or the U.S. Commerce  
Department's Table of Denial Orders.  
Memory Stick™, Memory Stick Duoand Memory Stick PRO Duoare  
trademarks of Sony, its parent and/or its affiliates.  
Beatnik is a trademark of Beatnik, Inc.  
T9™ Text Input is a trademark or a registered trademark of Tegic Communications  
T9™ Text Input is licensed under one or more of the following: U.S. Pat. Nos.  
5,818,437, 5,953,541, 5,187,480, 5,945,928, and 6,011,554; Canadian Pat. No.  
1,331,057, United Kingdom Pat. No. 2238414B, Hong Kong Standard Pat. No.  
HK0940329; Republic of Singapore Pat. No. 51383; Euro. Pat. No. 0 842 463  
(96927260.8) DE/DK, FI, FR, IT, NL, PT, ES, SE, GB; and additional patents are  
pending worldwide.  
3. Restricted Rights: Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States  
government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data  
and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR  
52.227-19(c) (2) as applicable.  
Copyright © SyncML initiative Ltd. (1999-2002). All rights reserved.  
Portions of software © PacketVideo Corporation (USA) 1999, 2002. PacketVideo,  
pvPlayer and the PacketVideo logo are trademarks of PacketVideo Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
Quicksheet, Quickpoint, Quickoffice and Quickword are either trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Cutting Edge Software, Inc.  
Adobe and Acroba are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe  
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.  
Microsoft Outlook, Visual Basic, Windows and PowerPoint are either registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the Unites States and/or  
other countries  
Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of  
their respective owners.  
Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved.  
Apple is a trademark of Apple Corporation, Inc.  
AppForge is a trademark of AppForge, Inc  
Lotus Notes and Lotus Organizer are trademarks of International Business  
Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.  
This product contains software copyright © Beatnik, Inc.  
1996-2002.  
Note Some of the services in this User Guide are not supported by all networks.  
This also applies to the GSM International Emergency Number 112. Please contact  
your network operator or service provider if you are in doubt whether you can use  
a particular service or not.  
7
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Important  
Your mobile phone has the capability to load, store and forward additional content,  
e.g. ring tone melodies. The use of such content may be restricted or prohibited by  
rights of third parties, including but not limited to restriction under applicable  
copyright laws. You, and not Sony Ericsson, are entirely responsible for additional  
content that you download to or forward from your mobile phone. Prior to your use  
of any additional content, please verify that your intended use is properly licensed  
or is otherwise authorized. Sony Ericsson does not guarantee the accuracy,  
integrity or quality of any additional content or any other third-party content.  
Under no circumstances will Sony Ericsson be liable in any way for your improper  
use of additional content or other third party content.  
8
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
OVERVIEW  
Introduction  
For ease of reference the Getting to know your P910a chapter  
gives a quick overview of the main functions of the phone,  
shortcuts and general information.  
The P910a also contains an organizer,  
which includes contacts, a calendar,  
notes and email, all of which can be  
quickly and efficiently synchronized  
with a PC. The email application  
supports attachments. Viewers let you  
read and edit documents in various  
formats such as Microsoft® Word and  
Excel®.  
Your P910a combines advanced business and entertainment  
features in one intuitive device.  
Its camera lets you take pictures and record video clips wherever  
you are and use them in a wide range of applications. The  
pictures can be used in the Picture Phonebook, where they can  
be used to identify callers.  
With Sony Ericsson Update Service  
you can keep your phone updated with  
the latest P910a software.  
MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) allows you to send and  
receive messages that include pictures, sound, text and voice  
notes.  
The complete P910a documentation  
consists of the following parts:  
The P910a features advanced entertainment functionality that  
offers high quality MP3 music and widescreen format video  
clips and 3D games. New content can be downloaded quickly  
and easily from Internet sites or transferred to the phone via  
BluetoothWireless Technology, an infrared port or a cable.  
Extra memory is available through a Memory Stick, which  
also serves as a convenient way to exchange content and  
applications such as Javagames.  
Quick Guide  
User Guide  
Instruction for removing the flip  
Help texts in the P910a  
Complementary information on the Internet, refer to  
www.SonyEricsson.com  
The P910a can be used as a corporate phone with PBXes such as  
Ericsson MD110.  
Introduction  
9
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Getting to know your P910a  
P910a package  
A
B
C
D
E
F
P910a with stylus  
Battery  
M
Travel charger  
SyncStation  
A
Stereo headset  
P910a  
Carry case and strap  
Extra stylus  
G
H
J
Memory Stick  
F
B
Memory Stick adapter  
Flip replacement cover  
Flip replacement tool set  
User documentation package  
Two CDs, Sony Ericsson PC Suite and Content and Application  
K
L
D
M
N
L
N
K
C
Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the  
market.  
H
Note If your package does not include all the listed items above,  
please contact your retailer.  
J
E
G
Note Before you can use your P910a you need to insert the SIM  
card, and insert and charge the battery. Always detach the  
charger before you insert or remove the SIM card.  
Getting to know your P910a  
10  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
P910a overview  
A
B
F
A
D
C
G
E
F
D
H
I
B
G
C
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Stylus  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Indicator light for Bluetooth wireless technology (blue)  
Screen  
External antenna connector  
CommuniCorder  
Flip with keypad and keyboard  
Battery compartment  
Connector for accessories and charger  
Connector for stereo headset  
Jog Dial  
Indicator light for network and battery (green/red)  
CommuniCorder activation and shutter release  
Internet button for activation of the browser  
Slot for Memory Stick  
G
Infrared port  
On/Off button  
11  
Getting to know your P910a  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SIM card  
Battery  
When you register as a subscriber with  
a network operator, you receive a SIM  
(Subscriber Identity Module) card. The  
SIM card contains a computer chip that  
keeps track of your phone number, the  
services included in your subscription  
and your phonebook information,  
among other things.  
Before you use your P910a for the first time, charge the battery  
provided for at least 4 hours. Use the supplied charger. See  
‘Charging the battery’ on page 13.  
Insertion and removal  
To insert the battery  
1. Ensure that the flip is closed.  
A PIN (Personal Identity Number)  
code is supplied with the SIM card  
from your operator and must be entered  
when switching on the P910a.  
2. Remove the battery cover by  
sliding it downwards.  
3. Place the battery in the battery  
compartment and close the  
cover.  
Open the battery cover by pressing slightly on its upper part and  
slide it down the P910a. Insert the SIM card as shown in the  
picture.  
To remove the battery  
1. Ensure that your P910a is  
turned off.  
Some subscriptions are limited to call only predefined numbers,  
so-called Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN). To avoid problems  
when traveling abroad, these predefined numbers should be  
defined as international numbers starting with +, for example  
+4613244500. In order to speed up calling while at home, the  
same numbers can also be added in the national number format,  
for example 013244500.  
Note It is important that you always turn off your P910a before  
removing the battery. Failure to do so can result in loss of  
information.  
2. Remove the battery cover by sliding it downwards.  
3. Use your fingernail at the lower left-hand edge of the battery  
to gently lift the lower edge of the battery outwards.  
For more information. see ‘Copying contacts to and from the  
SIM card’ on page 105.  
4. Take out the battery.  
Getting to know your P910a  
12  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. Wait approximately 4 hours or  
Charging the battery  
until the battery meter on the  
When the battery needs to be charged, a beep is heard. The  
indicator light (on the top of your P910a) flashes red and a  
battery low message appears on the screen.  
screen is full and the indicator  
on the top of the P910a shows  
a steady green light.  
The battery can be charged whenever you want. The P910a  
performance is not affected. However, using your P910a  
while charging increases the charging time.  
5. Remove the charger by tilting  
the plug upwards.  
Tip You can also use other battery chargers that have been  
supplied with other Sony Ericsson mobile phones using the same  
connector plug, for example, T300 or P900.  
To charge the battery  
The P910a can be charged either when it is switched on or off.  
1. Make sure the battery is inserted in your P910a and the cover  
is closed.  
Note When the battery is completely discharged, or new, it may  
take up to 30 minutes before the battery icon  
screen.  
appears on the  
2. Connect the charger to  
the P910a at the base of  
the phone by the flash  
symbol. The charger  
plug flash symbol must  
face upwards.  
Care instructions  
Your P910a is a highly sophisticated electronic device. To get  
the most out of it, please make sure that you follow this advice:  
3. Connect the charger to the mains.  
Keep the P910a in its carry case when not using it.  
Use a lightly moistened cloth when you clean the screen.  
Use only the stylus provided to tap the screen.  
Charging is indicated by the battery icon  
on the screen  
pulsing continuously, and the indicator at the top of the  
P910a showing a steady red light (or green, if the P910a is  
switched on).  
See also ‘Battery Use and Care’ on page 186.  
13  
Getting to know your P910a  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
functions. Set your P910a in Flight mode if the use of mobile  
phones is not allowed, or if you want to use the other functions  
but do not want incoming calls.  
First time start-up  
Please read ‘Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use’ on page 185  
before you start using your P910a.  
Note The first time you start your phone the start-up procedure  
will proceed slowly.  
Importing phonebook entries  
You may want to import existing contact information from  
When you start your P910a for the first time  
another mobile phone to your P910a. You can do this in several  
ways:  
1. Press the On/Off button to turn on your P910a, keeping the  
flip closed. The language selection dialog opens.  
Beam the phonebook entries from the other phone by  
2. Select one of the languages from the list. Read more about  
infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology and save the set to  
Contacts. See ‘Creating and editing contacts’ on  
page 103.  
selecting a language in ‘Language selection’ on page 168.  
3. Open the flip. Press the On/Off button again. The Setup Wizard  
starts and guides you through the essential settings.  
Synchronize the SIM and the internal memory on the other  
phone with Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes in a PC. Then  
4. The Power menu opens. Select Phone on.  
5. Enter your PIN when the dialog box appears and press  
synchronize this information with  
Contacts.  
. Press  
to delete a digit.  
Note When you synchronize Contacts with your PC, the SIM  
information will not be synchronized. You might get two versions  
of the same contact. See ‘Synchronization and backup’ on  
page 139.  
Turning your P910a on and off  
By default the Power menu prompts you to choose normal  
operation or Flight mode each time you press the On/Off button.  
These settings can be turned off. See To use the Power menu’  
on page 49.  
Phonebook entries stored on your SIM card are accessible  
through Contacts. Select SIM in the folders menu to the  
right in the menu bar to see the list of entries in your SIM  
phonebook. These entries can be imported to  
See ‘Copying contacts to and from the SIM card’ on  
page 105.  
Contacts  
.
In Flight mode the phone radio transmitter and Bluetooth  
functions are switched off, but you can still use the other  
Getting to know your P910a  
14  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
D
E
Shortcut to the Calendar application  
Flip closed mode  
Shows all applications available in flip closed mode  
With the keypad flip closed, the P910a can be used as a  
conventional mobile phone using the keypad to dial and the Jog  
Dial to navigate. For more information please see ‘Jog Dial’ on  
page 19 and ‘Keypad functions’ on page 20.  
C
B
D
A
You can open the flip at any time to continue working. Many  
more functions are available when the flip is open.  
Applications  
CommuniCorder  
Sony Eriicsson  
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Music player  
Messages  
Contacts  
Calendar  
Tasks  
Standby view  
11:20am  
Call list  
21/066/2004  
Applications  
Jotter  
The standby view shows shortcuts to the most commonly used  
applications. Choose which shortcuts you want to use in  
standby. See ‘Personalizing your P910a’ on page 144.  
Sound recorder  
Selecting and starting applications  
Rotate the Jog Dial to select an application. Press the Jog Dial  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CommuniCorder  
Music player  
Messages  
Contacts  
Calendar  
Tasks  
inwards or  
to start the application.  
Tip When  
view is selected, it is also possible to start an  
Jotter  
Sound recorder  
application by pressing its specific number.  
Connections  
Closing applications  
The current application automatically closes and the data is  
saved when you return to the standby view or switch to another  
application. To return to standby, press and hold  
Jog Dial backwards.  
Touch the Jog Dial to see the shortcut icons  
A
B
C
Shortcut to the Messages application  
Shortcut to the Contacts application  
Shortcut to the Call list application  
or press the  
15  
Getting to know your P910a  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Options menu  
Press  
or press the Jog Dial forwards to open the standby  
C
D
E
B
options menu to get access to keylock, battery status, accepted  
callers and more.  
F
CommuniCorder  
Pictures  
A
Video  
Music player  
Internet  
Flip open mode  
Messages  
Contacts  
Phone  
Applications Edit  
All  
When the flip is opened, the large touch-screen is revealed. You  
use the stylus to tap the screen to navigate and enter data. There  
is also a handwriting recognition feature, so that you can use the  
stylus to write on the screen.  
CommuniCorder  
Pictures  
Video  
Calendar  
Music player  
Internet  
Tasks  
Jotter  
Messages  
Contacts  
Phone  
Control panel  
Calculator  
Quicksheet  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Shortcut to the Messages application  
Shortcut to the Contacts application  
Shortcut to the Phone application  
Calendar  
Tasks  
Jotter  
Quickword  
Pdf+  
Sound recorder  
Controlpanel  
Calculator  
PDF  
Shortcut to the Calendar application  
Shortcut to the Internet application  
Shows all applications available in flip open mode  
File manager  
Storage wizard  
Remote Sync  
Demo  
GPRS data log  
Chess  
You can change the shortcuts A-E. See ‘Changing your  
application shortcuts’ on page 144.  
Solitaire  
i
Online services  
Time  
Getting to know your P910a  
16  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The Jog Dial provides further navigation and selection  
capability. Closing the flip generally ends an activity and saves  
You can use a virtual flip when the real flip is removed. Tap the  
the data. Multimedia phone calls and data sessions will,  
Virtual flip  
Enable virtual flip checkbox in  
settings and select the check box to activate it. When the virtual  
Control Panel > Other > Flip  
however, continue.  
flip is enabled,  
flip is open. Select  
is shown on the status bar when the virtual  
to ‘close’ the virtual flip.  
Navigation  
When the flip is open, the application shortcut icons shown in  
the flip closed mode move to the top row in the flip open screen.  
You navigate by using the stylus and tapping selected items and  
by using the Jog Dial, see ‘Jog Dial’ on page 19.  
When the virtual flip is closed, the virtual flip keypad is shown.  
Select to ‘open’ the virtual flip.  
Flip removed  
The flip can also be removed, which makes the organizer  
applications easier to access. When the flip is removed, the  
P910a works in flip open mode.  
Note Turn off the P910a before you remove the flip to avoid to  
damage your phone.  
To remove and attach the flip, refer to the separate instructions.  
Note Please note that Sony Ericsson does not accept any  
liability for lost parts or product defects resulting from any  
disassembly or modification of the product.  
17  
Getting to know your P910a  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
B Menu bar Usually contains two menus on the left, and a folder  
Screen areas  
menu on the right. The two left-hand menus contain:  
• the application menu, whose name is always the  
When the flip is closed, you use the keyboard and the Jog Dial.  
When the flip is open the screen is touch-sensitive. The screen is  
divided into a number of areas: see the figure and table below.  
same as the application. It contains the system  
services used by most applications, such as Find  
,
Send as, and Delete  
• the edit menus contain editing items such as Cut  
Preferences and Help.  
.
A
,
E
F
I
n
te  
r
t
B
C
11:03  
Copy Paste, Zoom,  
,
John Smith  
+4613244500 (h)  
With the flip closed, the menu bar often shows the  
function of the key.  
C Application Applications use this central area of the screen to  
C
B
area  
display the essential information.  
Many of the applications are based on two standard  
view layouts: a list view and a detail view.  
Sony Ericsson  
End call  
D
E
D Button bar An application view displays a button bar that  
contains useful controls and shortcuts. Not all  
application views require a button bar.  
E Status bar Displays device status information such as: signal  
strength, battery and device information, settings for  
sounds and time, on-screen keyboard, as well as  
temporary indicators such as missed calls and unread  
messages.  
Item  
Description  
A Application Displays six icons for quick and easy access to the  
picker most common applications. These can be customized.  
F Title bar  
Displays the name of the active application.  
Getting to know your P910a  
18  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Jog Dial  
Action  
Function  
Up  
Rotate the Jog Dial Scrolls items in a list up/to the left, increases  
up  
volume during a call, moves back a page when  
playing a multimedia message.  
Rotate the Jog Dial Scrolls items in a list down/to the right,  
down  
decreases volume during a call, moves forward  
a page when playing a multimedia message.  
Down  
Press the Jog Dial  
inwards  
Selects a highlighted item, dials selected phone  
numbers. Generally the same action as  
in flip closed.  
Press the Jog Dial  
backwards  
Goes back to the previous screen, dismisses  
dialogs, and sends a busy signal to the calling  
party when you receive a call. It will not end a  
Inwards  
call. Always the same action as  
closed and in flip open.  
in flip  
Press the Jog Dial  
forwards  
Flip closed: Brings up the Options menu. Press  
and hold takes you to the Applications list.  
Flip open: Toggles the Application, Edit and  
Category menus. Press and hold takes you to  
the Application launcher.  
Backwards  
Forwards  
19  
Getting to know your P910a  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Key  
Function  
Keypad functions  
STAR  
Key  
Function  
• Enter the character  
*.  
• Press and hold to enter a  
p
(pause) character.  
OK  
• Press to switch between different input modes  
(Abc, 123 ... ). This is useful when writing SMS  
or similar texts.  
• Press and hold to change between T9 and  
multitap.  
• Enter selected function, indicated on the display  
above the key.  
BACK  
• Return to previous menu.  
• Reject an incoming call.  
• Press and hold to return to Standby.  
HASH  
• Enter the character #.  
CLEAR  
• Press and hold to see a list with special  
characters.  
• Terminate the input of PIN and security codes.  
• Retrieve a phone number from the SIM card  
phonebook. Enter the number of the memory  
• Delete entered characters/digits from the screen  
one by one.  
• Press and hold to delete an entire row of entered  
characters/digits.  
• Delete an entry from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks,  
Sound Recorder, and Messages.  
• Press and hold to disconnect the microphone  
(mute function) when a call is in progress.  
• Mute the ring signal during an incoming call.  
• Pause/play the melody when the Music player is  
open.  
position and then press  
.
-
NUMERIC KEYS  
• Enter the digits 0 to 9.  
• Enter associated characters or perform associated  
functions. See ‘Shortcuts’ on page 42.  
• Press and hold digits 1 to 9 to open Contacts.  
• Press and hold to put the P910a into silent mode,  
when in the standby view.  
OPTIONS  
• Open the menu with different options for  
different applications.  
• Press and hold to open Applications.  
Getting to know your P910a  
20  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Icon  
Function  
Indicators and status bar icons  
Calls screened  
These icons appear in the flip closed standby screen or in the  
status bar when the flip is open. When the flip is open, you can  
often tap the icons to get more detailed information or start an  
application.  
SMS notification  
MMS notification  
Email notification  
SMS overflow  
Time  
Icon  
Function  
Signal strength, GPRS available  
Signal strength, GPRS not available  
Battery strength  
Time, alarm set  
Keylock  
Bluetooth on  
Bluetooth discoverable  
Bluetooth headset connected  
Infrared on  
Magic word  
Keyboard  
Multimedia volume  
Speakerphone  
Muted microphone  
Silent mode  
GPRS active  
GPRS data transfer in progress  
Ongoing data call  
Ongoing call  
Home network  
Voicemail notification  
Missed call  
Forward all calls notification  
21  
Getting to know your P910a  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note Insert the Memory Stick correctly to avoid damage to your  
P910a or the Memory Stick.  
Memory Stick  
Memory Sticks provide a convenient way of increasing the  
The Memory Stick supplied with the P910a may or may not be a  
version that contains the lock function. Remember, you can  
overwrite existing files without the lock function.  
storage space in the phone. You can use both Memory Stick  
Duoand Memory Stick PRO Duoin your P910a. Memory  
Sticks used in P800 or P900 can be used in P910a but you  
cannot use a P910a Memory Stick PRO Duoin P800 or P900.  
You can save pictures, video clips, music, and voice recordings  
as well as computer data and applications on a Memory Stick  
and use it to store or transfer the contents for many different  
purposes. These include:  
To remove the Memory Stick  
Press the edge of the Memory Stick using your fingernail or the  
stylus to release it. You hear a click as it jumps out of the slot.  
Note Be careful not to drop the Memory Stick when removing it.  
Storing backup copies of important files.  
Renaming a Memory Stick  
Storing media for personalizing your P910a.  
Storing media for use when composing MMS messages.  
Storing installation files for new applications.  
Transferring data between the P910a and a PC or Mac.  
Providing storage for third-party applications.  
You can rename a Memory Stick to give it a name that is  
meaningful to you. The name you set will be shown in the  
divider between internal and external storage in the folder menu.  
See ‘Folders’ on page 28. There are two ways to rename a  
Memory Stick:  
To insert the Memory Stick  
Select  
See ‘Format disk’ on page 167.  
Select  
Control Panel > Other > Format disk and tap Rename.  
1. Open the cover for the Memory  
Stick slot.  
File manager > File > Format disk and tap Rename  
.
2. Insert the Memory Stick in the  
slot, with the connector side  
towards the back (see picture).  
Make sure it is securely inserted.  
A click should be heard.  
Renaming will not erase any data.  
Copying and moving data  
For information on how to copy and move data to and from the  
Memory Stick, refer to ‘Folders’ on page 28.  
Getting to know your P910a  
22  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Compatibility  
Formatting a Memory Stick  
The P910a defines its own folder structure on a Memory Stick.  
New Memory Sticks are normally automatically formatted first  
Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in  
time they are inserted in a phone. The phone stops working  
during the formatting and it can take some time.  
one application is not visible in another.  
Other devices must access the same folder structure to interact  
Note Do not remove a Memory Stick during formatting. If  
with the P910a files. If you are using a PC, this is easily done by  
removed it will be unusable.  
browsing to the required folder on the Memory Stick.  
If you need to reformat a Memory Stick, select  
> Other > Format disk and tap Format, or select  
File > Format disk and tap Format. When you format a Memory  
Stick, you delete all the information on it, including any  
applications that you may have installed.  
Control Panel  
File manager >  
Memory Stick enabled devices which do not allow you to  
browse and manage a folder structure may not be able to share  
data directly with the applications in your P910a (for example,  
Memory Stick enabled digital cameras). However, the File  
Manager can access these files and move them into the correct  
folders for use by the applications. When your P910a is  
connected to your PC, you also have access to the P910a folder  
Sharing data with other devices  
Your P910a uses the shorter Memory Stick variants, Memory  
Stick Duo and Memory Stick PRO Duo.  
structure as well as other Memory Stick content in My P910a  
.
Personal computer support  
Memory Stick adapter  
Both PCs and Apple computers may be enabled for Memory  
Stick use via built-in Memory Stick slots, floppy disk adapters,  
PC card adapters, and Memory Stick enabled mice. (Memory  
Stick adapter required.)  
Use the Memory Stick adapter when using your Memory Stick  
in a device equipped with a regular sized Memory Stick, for  
example a personal computer. Insert your Memory Stick  
according to the picture on the adapter.  
For more information about Sony Memory Stick, visit  
Warning! Do not insert a Memory Stick adapter without a  
Memory Stick into a Memory Stick slot. This may damage the  
product. Always insert the adapter in the slot with the connector  
end (marked with a triangle) first.  
www.memorystick.com.  
23  
Getting to know your P910a  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
A
The travel charger is connected to the SyncStation or to the P910a.  
Note The design of the charger will differ depending on the  
market.  
Connecting the accessories  
E
C
B
C
D
The USB connector from the SyncStation is connected to a PC.  
The headset is connected to the P910a.  
Other accessories can be connected to the connector at the base of  
the P910a.  
E
A car holder can be connected to the antenna connector at the rear.  
Note Remove the plastic plug before connecting the P910a to the  
car holder.  
B
D
The wrist strap is threaded through  
the holes next to the connector at  
the bottom of the P910a.  
A
Getting to know your P910a  
24  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
You can uninstall the demo application and also reinstall it from  
the Content and Application CD. See ‘Removing applications  
from your P910a’ on page 133 for how to uninstall the demo  
Services  
You need the following services to use the P910a functions:  
application and ‘Installing applications on your P910a’ on  
page 131 for how to reinstall it.  
To use...  
You need...  
phone services  
text messaging (SMS)  
GSM subscription  
GSM subscription  
To start the demo  
multimedia messaging (MMS) MMS account, GSM data subscription  
1. Select the Applications icon  
.
email  
email account, GSM data subscription  
2. Select the Demo icon  
and the demo starts.  
Internet  
Internet account, WAP account (only  
for WAP 1.x services), GSM data  
subscription  
To stop the demo  
Tap the screen or rotate the Jog Dial to stop the demo.  
The demo also stops when any other dialog is opened.  
data communication  
GSM data subscription  
Please consult your network operator and Internet service  
provider about the services that are available to you.  
Note When the flip is open, an incoming text or MMS message  
will not stop the demo.  
The Demo application can be launched also when the P910a is  
started without a SIM card inserted. When the P910a asks you to  
insert the SIM card, just press OK. If the flip is closed, open it.  
Applications - overview  
You can start applications in different ways. Select icons in the  
standby view (flip closed) and in the application picker (flip  
Phone  
open) to start the most important ones. Select  
applications.  
to list all  
This is the mobile phone application. When the flip is opened,  
select  
to start it.  
Demo application (Not in all phone versions)  
The Demo application shows some of the most common  
functions in your P910a. You can release this application to  
remove memory.  
25  
Getting to know your P910a  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Call list  
Music player  
The call list displays the most recent calls, either outgoing,  
incoming or missed. In flip closed, press the Jog Dial or  
to call the selected entry. To view the call list when the flip is  
open, open Phone and tap the call list icon.  
Plays music tracks and other audio files. You can download  
these from the Internet or transfer them from your PC. The  
player supports the most common sound formats. You can save  
music tracks on the Memory Stick.  
CommuniCorder  
Internet (flip open only)  
For taking video clips and still pictures. In CommuniCorder  
view, the screen becomes a viewfinder. Press the  
CommuniCorder button or the Jog Dial to start recording or take  
a photo. Alternatively tap the red button at the bottom of the  
screen.  
The Internet browser can access both Web and WAP pages. It  
can also download images, video clips, audio files, and Java  
applications.  
Messages  
You can read, create, send and delete text (SMS), multimedia  
(MMS) and email messages in this view.  
Pictures (flip open only)  
Manages your pictures. You can take pictures with  
CommuniCorder, or receive them via email, Bluetooth wireless  
technology and infrared communication. Download via the  
Internet browser, or transfer them from your PC. With the image  
editor you can also edit your pictures.  
Contacts  
Displays a list of your contacts. Select a contact to view  
associated contact data.  
Calendar  
Video (flip open only)  
The Calendar view displays entries for the current day. Use the  
Jog Dial to get more information about a selected entry or to  
change days.  
Plays video clips. You can record video clips with  
CommuniCorder, download them from Internet or transfer them  
from your PC. You can stream video and audio from the  
Internet.  
Tasks  
Keeps track of your tasks. Set due date, alarm, priority, and so  
on, for all your tasks and let your P910a remind you in time.  
Getting to know your P910a  
26  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Quicksheet,  
Quickword,  
Quickpoint,  
File manager (flip open only)  
You can handle the content and organization of media, both in  
the P910a and on the Memory Stick.  
PDF  
Pdf+ (flip open only)  
Use them to view and edit various types of documents.  
Quickpoint- and Pdf-documents cannot be edited.  
Storage Wizard (flip open only)  
Helps you to release memory. The icon  
bar when the memory is running short. Tap it to start the Storage  
Wizard.  
appears in the status  
Jotter  
Displays a list of stored entries. In detailed view, the complete  
entry is displayed.  
Remote Sync (flip open only)  
Control panel (flip open only)  
Performs synchronization over the air. Using GPRS, the P910a  
can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization  
server. Remote Sync works equally well over CSD or HSCSD.  
Contains all settings that are system-wide and affect more than  
one application. This is the main view to use when initially  
setting up your P910a.  
Online services  
i
Note Settings for Flight mode and P910a locks are located  
Your service provider may offer different services, for example,  
weather forecasts, financial information or newsletters. Contact  
your service provider for more information.  
under Control panel > Device  
Calculator (flip open only)  
A standard 10-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply,  
divide, calculate square roots and percentages.  
GPRS data log (flip open only)  
A list of GPRS Internet accounts. Open an account to view your  
logged GPRS traffic, including your costs. The P910a creates a  
new data log when a connection to an account is created.  
Sound recorder  
You can use your P910a as a sound recorder.  
Connections (flip closed only)  
Time (flip open only)  
Set the way you communicate with your PC or other devices.  
Select between infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology and  
cable. In the cable menu, you can also select whether the P910a  
synchronizes with a PC or acts as a wireless modem.  
Shows time and date. You can set your current location and  
another. You can also set different alarms.  
27  
Getting to know your P910a  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
a handheld device. If you make it a habit to set up specific  
Updating the software  
folders to suit your needs and use them to categorize all your  
With Sony Ericsson Update Service you can keep your phone  
information, working with it becomes easy.  
updated with the latest P910a software. See “Sony Ericsson  
Update Service” on page 133 how to download the software  
from the Internet.  
Each application has its own set of folders. A folder created in  
one application is not visible in another.  
For each application there is a default Unfiled folder. Since there  
is no way of seeing on your P910a, whether a file in an Unfiled  
folder is located on your P910a or on a Memory Stick, we  
recommend that you move files to your own folders as soon as  
possible.  
General functions  
Application launcher views  
Every item created in an application is always assigned to a  
single folder, by default the folder as displayed in the list view.  
In flip open, the P910a can present the applications in two ways:  
List view (small icons appear in one column)  
Icon view (large icons appear in two columns)  
In list view, the folder menu is used to organize your entries. In  
detail view, the folder menu allows you to change the folder of  
the current item.  
Folders  
Using the folder menu  
In the applications that use folders you can see the folder menu  
to the right in the menu bar.  
Folders are used to organize information, for example contacts,  
jotter entries, or task lists. You might want to organize your  
contacts in business and personal folders.  
When a Memory Stick is available in the P910a, the folders on it  
are shown in the folder menu under the divider. If you rename  
the disk (see ‘Renaming a Memory Stick’ on page 22) the  
divider will show the new name.  
Folders are also used when managing files of different types on  
your P910a and Memory Stick. You might want to move or copy  
sound files into a sound track folder to store on a Memory Stick.  
As you may notice, if you connect your P910a to a PC and view  
the contents of your P910a in My P910a, it is easier to get an  
overview of a folder and file structure on a large screen than on  
In list view, there is a super-folder called All, which, when  
selected, displays items from all folders (in  
Contacts, the All  
Getting to know your P910a  
28  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
folder does not display the entries in the SIM phonebook). All is  
the default value in list views and when an application is first  
launched.  
To copy a file to another folder  
1. Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the  
destination folder. Select Copy to in the main application  
menu; for example Music or Pictures  
.
Use the Edit Folders menu item to:  
2. Select the destination Folder from the list and tap Copy.  
Rename a folder, or move a folder to or from the Memory  
Stick. Select the folder you want to move or rename, tap Edit  
type the name of the new folder, and choose a Location from  
,
Tip To delete multiple files in an application you can use  
Storage manager. See ‘Deleting or copying general files’ on  
page 170.  
the list. Tap Done  
To add a new folder. Tap Add, enter a folder Name and choose  
Location from the list Tap Done  
.
a
.
.
Managing your files  
To delete a folder. Select the folder you want to delete and tap  
Delete. A folder can only be deleted if it is empty. Not all  
folders can be deleted.  
Using the File Manager, you can handle the content and  
organization of media, both in the P910a and on the Memory  
Stick. See ‘File manager’ on page 126.  
You can also use the Storage manager in the Control Panel. See  
‘Storage manager’ on page 169.  
To copy all the files in a folder to another folder  
1. From within an application such as Pictures or Video, select a  
folder from the folder menu. From the application menu, first  
Zooming  
select Select all and then Copy  
.
You can change the size of the screen fonts. Choose between  
2. Select the destination Folder from the list and select Copy.  
Small, Medium or Large. From the menu bar, tap Edit > Zoom.  
To move a file from one folder to another  
Open the file in detail view. In the folder menu, select the  
destination folder.  
Automatic saving  
When you work in an application and leave it, your work is  
automatically saved.  
29  
Getting to know your P910a  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To send an item using Send as  
Find  
1. Enter the Send as menu in the specific application.  
The Find function searches through all the items stored in an  
application. The standard Find dialog contains a single text edit  
box with two buttons, Find and Cancel. Selecting Find starts the  
search, while Cancel closes the Find dialog.  
2. Depending on the application and item, you can choose  
between the following transfer methods:  
Text message (using SMS): P910a will create a new text  
message. Add the mobile number of the recipient and tap  
In some applications, for example Messages, Find may be more  
advanced:  
Send  
.
Email: the P910a will create a new message with the item  
included as an attachment. Complete with address and  
The size of each message is so large that you may want to  
restrict the search to the current message only.  
subject, and tap Send  
.
Folders are potentially more significant, so you may want to  
restrict the search to the current folder only.  
Multimedia message (using MMS): the P910a will create a new  
message with the item included as an attachment. Complete  
the message and tap Send  
.
Sorting your files  
Infrared: align the infrared port of the P910a with the infrared  
port of the other device. Select Send. Messages on screen will  
tell you when the information has been transferred.  
You can sort the files you have stored in your P910a. By sorting  
your files, you choose in which order you want the files to be  
displayed on the screen. You can choose between sorting by, for  
example type, size, date, or name.  
Bluetooth wireless technology: the P910a will search the local  
area for Bluetooth devices that are set to be visible. These  
will be presented in a list. Select a device to which the item is  
to be sent and select Send. Progress messages will tell you  
when the information has been transferred.  
Note Sort is not included in all applications.  
Sending and receiving items  
From many applications it is possible to exchange items like  
appointments, contacts and images.  
Tip The other devices must have Bluetooth wireless technology  
enabled. You can select Refresh to perform a new search if, for  
example, a destination device was not enabled at first.  
Getting to know your P910a  
30  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To handle items received in email and multimedia messages  
Memory Stick (expansion memory).  
1. Tap the notification icon  
, or  
SIM card, for phone numbers and associated names. See  
open Messages and select MMS or an email inbox.  
2. Open the message.  
‘Copying contacts to and from the SIM card’ on page 105.  
Other memory-expansion alternatives available on the  
market.  
3. Select the attachments tab.  
4. Select the required attachment. The attachment or a summary  
of the attachment will be displayed.  
Getting help and setting zoom  
From the menu bar tap Edit > Help to get to the P910a help system  
or set the zoom level. The help system uses two views:  
5. Select Save to save the item. You may optionally display the  
received item within the related application.  
The Topics view shows all available topics, for example both  
specific application topics and general topics.  
See ‘Messages’ on page 86 for more information.  
To receive beamed items  
The Detail view presents the title and text of a single topic.  
1. Ensure that infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology is  
activated and, for infrared, that the infrared ports are aligned.  
The Topics view allows you to select a topic, which opens the  
detail view and displays the selected topic.  
2. The received item will be notified by a dialog box listing the  
item(s) received. When using Bluetooth you will also be  
asked to accept or reject the connection.  
In many dialog boxes you can select the Help icon  
upper right corner.  
in the  
3. Select View to view item. Select Done to save the item in the  
Settings  
Beamed inbox in Messages. Select Delete to delete the item.  
For settings that are application-specific, tap Edit > Preferences in  
the application menu bar. For generic settings, use Control panel  
.
Methods for storing data  
Your P910a can store data in different ways:  
Internal memory. Used for storing pictures, messages, music,  
applications, and so on.  
31  
Getting to know your P910a  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Press  
mode.  
to switch between the input types in text edit  
Entering text with the flip  
closed  
Inserting symbols  
When you are editing text you can press  
on the application, choose Add symbol or Text options > Add symbol  
to select an item from the symbol selector table. Use the Jog  
With the flip closed, you use the keypad keys to enter text, for  
example, when writing a text message. When you press a key, a  
pre-edit box with the different characters on that key is shown in  
the title area:  
and, depending  
Dial to select the row and press  
row to select a symbol and press  
. Then scroll within the  
.
If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-  
edit box will be selected.  
T9® text input  
The  
key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. If  
continuously pressed, the  
and then whole words.  
key deletes several characters  
You can use T9Text Input when writing, for example text  
messages and email. The T9 Text Input method uses a built-in  
dictionary to recognize the most commonly used word for each  
sequence of key presses. This way, you press each key only  
once, even when the letter you want is not the first letter on the  
Types of text input  
There are four text input types:  
key. Press and hold  
to change input method.  
Abc – initial uppercase letter, the rest lowercase. Default for  
each new text edit field.  
123 – numeric entry only  
ABC – uppercase entry  
abc – lowercase entry  
The following example shows how to start writing a text.  
To enter letters using T9 Text Input  
1. Select, for example, Messages > Create SMS  
.
2. For example, if you want to write the word ‘Jane’, press  
.
When you are editing text you can:  
During text entry, a suggestion list with word candidates are  
presented. The most frequently used word is highlighted.  
Press  
input type.  
and select Text options > Input type to select text  
3. If the word is the word you want:  
Getting to know your P910a  
32  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
– Press  
or  
to accept and add a space.  
Use T9 Use multitap, to switch between T9 Text Input and  
/
multitap text input  
If the word is not the one you want:  
Add symbol, adds symbols and punctuation marks.  
– Scroll with the Jog Dial up or down to view alternative  
Input type, changes the text input type between Abc  
,
abc, ABC  
words (candidates). Press  
add a space.  
to accept the word and  
and 123  
.
Copy all Paste, to copy all text to the clipboard, and for  
/
If you do not find the word you want:  
– Press to go to a list of options.  
pasting the copied text to the place of the text cursor.  
– Select Text options > Spell word  
.
Entering text with the flip open  
– Edit the word using multitap text input and press OK.The  
word is added to the user dictionary. The next time you  
enter the word, it will appear as one of the alternative  
words.  
There are three ways of entering text with the flip open:  
Use the on-screen keyboard  
screen.  
located at the bottom of the  
4. Continue writing your message.  
Write directly on the screen using the stylus.  
Use the keyboard on the inside of the flip.  
Press  
to enter a full stop. To enter other punctuation  
and use the Jog Dial.  
marks, press  
If you press  
and select Text options when writing, you get  
a list of options:  
Spell word, to edit the entered word.  
My words, to view the user dictionary.  
Language, to change language.  
Show suggestion list Hide suggestion list, to switch the  
/
candidates window on and off.  
33  
Getting to know your P910a  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
On-screen  
keyboard  
When you need to edit text,  
tap the keyboard icon in the  
status bar and then select  
characters. Tap Done when  
ready.  
Handwriting recognition  
Handwriting recognition  
translates stylus gestures  
C
a
l
e
nd
a
rEdit  
Unfiled  
Weekly meeting  
C
o
tactsEdit  
n
Unfiled  
into letters, numbers or  
other characters, and  
displays these characters  
as text. Handwriting  
recognition is only active  
in places where text can  
be input.  
Jane  
First name  
Last name  
Job title  
Jones  
Type  
Appointment  
Graphic Desig  
Description  
Done  
Tap  
> Setup to change  
Phone (w)  
Phone (h)  
Mobile (w)  
Ring tone  
Email (w)  
Fax (w)  
Weekly meeting  
language for the keyboard.  
At the bottom left of the  
keyboard you can choose  
between three keyboard  
layouts with different  
character sets.  
1
q
2
w
a
3
e
s
4
r
5
t
6
y
g
7
u
h
8
i
9
o
0
p
The text mode screen is  
split into an upper and a  
lower part, by an arrow  
in the middle of the right  
edge. Write lowercase  
letters below the arrow  
and uppercase letters in  
line with it. Write  
Default n...  
cap  
d
f
j
k
l
z
x
c
v
b
n
m
.
abc aeo 123  
,
? @  
Web  
abc - standard characters  
àëó - international characters  
numbers above the arrow.  
123 - numeric characters and currencies  
Mark text by putting the stylus on the text, wait a moment, and  
drag the stylus over the text.  
The current input field is shown to the left in the top bar of the  
keyboard. Tap the arrows or rotate the Jog Dial to change the  
input field. The keyboard top bar also contains a drop-down  
Note Most letters can be written using different stroke styles.  
See the tables below. The style does not determine case. The  
position on the screen decides case.  
menu with Cut  
,
Copy and Paste. When copying or cutting, the text  
must be selected first.  
Getting to know your P910a  
34  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Letters  
Accented letters  
Lowercase letters are written below the arrow and uppercase  
letters in line with the arrow.  
Write the character as described above, then write the accent  
above the arrow. Other such characters, for example, ö and ü,  
follow the same principle.  
.
a
b
c
d
e
f
n
o
p
q
r
,
?
!
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
1
2
Numbers  
Numbers are written above the arrow.  
&
2
1
@
=
.
0
1
s
t
8
9
+
1
g
or  
*
'
2
h
i
u
v
w
x
y
z
"
,
2
3
4
5
6
2
1
*
/
2
1
2
1
j
1
2
1
2
k
l
m
\
(
)
7
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.  
35  
Getting to know your P910a  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Extended characters  
Press the space key to enter a character space to the right of the  
cursor. Press and hold the space key to move the cursor forward  
by inserting 6 space characters at a time.  
To write symbols and characters that are not shown in these  
tables, please consult the Extended characters section of the  
Handwriting recognition help topic in your phone.  
Note When typing, press the keys one after another. Not, for  
CAPS  
example,  
and simultaneously.  
E
Flip keyboard  
Using the CAPS key  
Located on the inside of the flip,  
the keyboard is similar in design  
to that of a standard computer  
keyboard.  
CAPS  
The  
key is used to capitalize or 'caps-lock' characters on  
the keyboard.  
CAPS  
Press  
once followed by, for example, 'E' to write a  
capital letter. Any additional keys pressed will be displayed  
in lowercase.  
With the flip open you use the  
keyboard keys to enter text, for  
example, when writing a text  
message. When you press a key,  
CAPS  
Press  
twice for caps-lock. Any additional keys pressed  
CAPS  
will be displayed in uppercase until  
remove caps-lock.  
is pressed again to  
if there are additional characters  
associated with that key, then these will be shown in a pre-edit  
Using the 123 key  
box in the title area:  
e 'e ee é è e ê  
The  
key is used to access the colored characters and  
If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-  
edit box will be selected. You can also use the Jog Dial to run  
through and select characters in the pre-edit box. (The pre-edit  
box will be displayed on screen for as long as you have the key  
depressed.) When the key is released, the highlighted character  
will be selected after approximately 1 second.  
numbers on the keyboard keys.  
Press  
once followed by, for example,  
E
to type the  
number  
3. Any additional keys pressed will display the  
standard characters on the keys.  
Press  
twice to lock the colored characters and numbers.  
Any additional keys pressed will type the colored characters  
Press  
to delete the character or spaces to the left of the  
or numbers until  
is pressed again.  
cursor. Press and hold  
whole words.  
to delete several characters and then  
Getting to know your P910a  
36  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Inserting symbols  
SIM card lock  
There are a number of ways to insert symbols with the P910a  
The SIM card lock protects your SIM card, not the P910a,  
keyboard.  
against unauthorized use. It is unlocked by the PIN and PUK  
codes which you receive from your service provider.  
Press the  
or  
keys to show additional symbols in the  
pre-edit box in the title area.  
You can choose to have to unlock the SIM card every time you  
turn the P910a on, or to have the SIM card unlocked.  
Use the  
to access the colored symbols on the keys.  
Holding down the  
key for a short time will generate the  
Your PIN (Personal Identification Number) code consists of four  
to eight digits. If you activate the SIM card lock, the P910a will  
ask for the PIN code every time you turn it on. You unlock the  
SIM card by entering the PIN code.  
symbol selector table. To select a symbol use the Jog Dial by  
first scrolling through the rows, and select the row by  
pressing the Jog Dial inwards. Then use the Jog Dial to scroll  
within the row, and selecting the symbol by pressing the Jog  
Dial inwards.  
To activate the SIM card lock  
See “Flip settings” on page 167 how to specify which keyboard  
your P910a has.  
1. Select  
2. Select a lock option.  
3. Select Done  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
.
An error message informs you if a wrong PIN code has been  
entered. Usually, the SIM card will be blocked after three wrong  
attempts (the number of attempts is SIM-card dependent), and  
you need to enter the PUK code to unblock it.  
P910a locks  
Use the SIM card lock and the device lock to protect your SIM  
card and your P910a from unauthorized use. Use the keylock to  
prevent the keys from being accidentally pressed.  
The PUK code consists of eight digits. When you have entered  
the right PUK code you must enter a new PIN code. You have  
ten attempts to enter the PUK code. If all ten attempts fail, the  
Note You can usually make an emergency call without  
unlocking the P910a.  
37  
Getting to know your P910a  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SIM card will be disabled and you need to contact your network  
operator.  
The default device lock code is 0000.  
To activate the device lock  
You cannot change the PUK code.  
1. Select  
2. Select a lock option.  
3. Select Done  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
PIN2  
Some functions on the SIM card can be protected by a  
secondary code feature. Some SIM cards do not have a PIN2  
lock.  
.
You can choose to have the P910a locked every time you turn it  
on, locked when the SIM card has been changed, or unlocked.  
The PIN2 lock cannot be deactivated. The code can be changed  
by a user who knows the old code.  
It is also possible to use the device lock in combination with the  
screen saver. Just mark the checkbox  
Control panel > Device >  
Display > Screen > Screen saver device lock to have the device lock  
activated when the screen saver goes on.  
Device lock  
The device lock protects your P910a and the data in it against  
unauthorized use.  
Note When using the screen saving device lock, make sure you  
have set the device lock to activate at Power on. Otherwise your  
P910a will be unprotected after Power on, until the screen saver  
goes on.  
If the device lock is set to When SIM changed, it means that the  
P910a is not normally locked. However, if the SIM has been  
changed, the P910a asks you to enter the code to unlock the  
P910a before you can use it. This means that if someone steals  
your P910a and puts another SIM card into it, they will not be  
able to use it.  
Note You will not be able to browse the contents of your P910a  
from a PC, or synchronize items using the SyncStation, when the  
P910a device lock is enabled and active.  
Note Your operator can block your SIM, if you report that your  
phone has been stolen.  
The device lock is not on when you buy your P910a. You can  
change the device lock code to any four to eight digit personal  
code.  
Getting to know your P910a  
38  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
with the flip removed. When this setting is active, the screen  
will automatically become locked after a period of inactivity.  
Change code  
To change a code  
To activate or change the screen lock  
1. Select  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
1. Select  
> Settings > Screen > Automatic input lock.  
2. Select Change Codes.  
2. Select a lock time or Off  
.
3. Select the code you want to change.  
4. First enter the old code, then the new one. (To ensure that  
you have typed the new code correctly you have to enter it  
twice.)  
To lock the screen  
Select  
> Lock screen.  
To unlock the screen  
Push the Jog Dial Forwards > Inwards or Backwards > Inwards  
.
Automatic keylock  
This option locks the keys on your P910a when the flip is  
closed. This is to protect the device if the keys are accidentally  
pressed. When this setting is active, the keypad will become  
automatically locked after a period of inactivity.  
To activate or change the keylock  
Select  
Control panel > Device > Locks.  
To unlock the keys  
Select  
>
.
Screen lock  
This option locks the screen of your P910a. This is to protect the  
device if the screen is accidentally pressed in flip open mode or  
39  
Getting to know your P910a  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Phone  
The Phone application is easy for the beginner, yet powerful for  
the advanced user. It can be used together with the other  
functions of the P910a, including applications from developers  
outside Sony Ericsson.  
Flight mode which enables the P910a to be used as a PDA in  
situations where radio transmitters may not be used. The  
GSM and Bluetooth transmitters (and receivers) are switched  
off.  
The phone includes useful features such as:  
With the flip closed you can access most of the functions using  
the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced tasks such as  
handling a conference calls or using other applications during a  
call are best handled with the flip open.  
Personalized ring types.  
Picture phonebook.  
Quick access back to the entries in Contacts, making it easy  
to try an alternative number or send a message if the contact  
is unavailable or busy.  
Some options may be hidden or not available depending on your  
subscription.  
Voice-dialing – make a call by saying the contact’s name.  
Voice answer – an incoming call may be answered or sent a  
busy signal, using the words recorded for ‘answer’ and  
‘busy’.  
Call handling with the flip closed  
With the flip closed, you can use either the keypad or the Jog  
Dial to handle calls.  
Incoming call acceptance limit – specify those who should be  
able to reach you.  
Outgoing calls  
Access to other applications while talking on the phone.  
To make a call  
Office handsfree (speakerphone) which starts when you open  
the flip, making it easy to access applications such as  
Calendar and Jotter while talking.  
Enter the phone number on the keypad and press the Jog Dial or  
press  
.
Press  
to delete a typed character. Press and hold  
delete all characters  
to  
.
Phone  
40  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Press and hold  
to insert the international call prefix  
+.  
2. Press the Jog Dial or  
.
Press and select Hide my number when you have  
3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select a contact.  
4. Scroll by rotating the Jog Dial and select the desired number.  
entered the phone number, if you do not want to show your  
phone number to the party you are calling. Select Show my  
number, if you want to show it.  
5. Press the Jog Dial or  
.
For more information, see ‘Contacts’ on page 100.  
If the called party is busy, a dialog box appears from which you  
can set your P910a to automatically retry to connect.  
To make a call using voice control  
1. There are various ways to make a call using voice control.  
– Press and hold the Jog Dial.  
To make a call using Speed dial  
Speed dial is a fast way to call one of your special numbers. See  
‘Set up speed dial numbers’ on page 48.  
– Press and hold  
.
– Say the ‘Magic word’.  
1. Press the key corresponding to the number of the speed dial  
contact.  
– Press the call button on the headset.  
The speed dial name is shown above the  
picture is attached to the speed dial, the picture is also shown.  
key. If a  
When the Magic word function is active, the  
appears in the status bar.  
icon  
2. Press  
.
2. When you hear a short tone, say the voice command linked to  
the number you want to call. The P910a will connect you  
with the matching contact.  
To make a call using the Call list  
1. Select  
2. Press the Jog Dial or  
3. Scroll the list by rotating the Jog Dial and select an entry.  
4. Press the Jog Dial or  
on the standby screen.  
You can use voice control when the P910a is handheld, used  
with a handsfree set (car or portable), or with a Bluetooth  
wireless technology headset. Magic word cannot be used  
together with a Bluetooth wireless technology headset.  
.
.
Read more about this in Voice control’ on page 52.  
To make a call using Contacts  
1. Select on the standby screen.  
41  
Phone  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To make an emergency call  
Enter the emergency number on the keypad and press  
the Jog Dial.  
Incoming calls  
or  
When you receive a call, the name of the caller will be displayed  
if the calling party is in Contacts and the caller’s number is  
received from the network. If there is an associated picture it  
will also be shown in a small or large version. See ‘Incoming  
call picture’ on page 52.  
Usually, but not always, no SIM card or PIN code is required for  
emergency calls and you will be able to make the call as long as  
you have coverage from a GSM network. Check with your local  
provider to find out if emergency calls are possible without a  
SIM card, and which emergency call numbers are supported.  
You can select whether an ongoing program will remain active  
when you get an incoming call or if the Phone program shall  
interrupt it. For settings see “Incoming call behavior” on page  
56.  
To end a call  
Press  
, or press the Jog Dial.  
To handle an incoming call  
Shortcuts  
You can press  
to answer the call or answer by voice  
control, see Voice control’ on page 52.  
Press and hold  
to dial your voicemail. With the flip  
open, select Phone > Call voicemail  
.
You can press  
ring signal.  
to reject a call and press  
to silence the  
See Voicemail’ on page 55 on how to set up voicemail.  
An incoming call will bring up the following options:  
Press any of the keys from to followed by  
to call a speed dial number.  
twice to call the last dialed number.  
Press and hold any of the keys from to  
your Contact list. Press again to reach the next letter.  
Additional key presses will add letters to your search.  
1 Answer – Answer the call.  
Press  
2 Send Busy – Reject the call. The calling party will hear a  
busy tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call.  
to open  
3 Mute – Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not  
notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged  
as a missed call.  
Press any digit followed by  
in the SIM phonebook.  
to reach a phone number  
If a large picture of the caller fills the screen, you can press  
or use the Jog Dial to access the menu with the options above.  
Press  
for the last dialed number.  
Phone  
42  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Speakerphone On/Off You can use the P910a as a  
speakerphone. See ‘Speakerphone’ on page 47.  
Options during or directly after a call  
Use the Jog Dial to change the phone volume during a call.  
Applications – Open another application, and, for example,  
paste a copied phone number into a Jotter entry.  
Press  
to get a list of call handling options. The list will  
vary depending on the situation. Options that concern two or  
more active calls are described in ‘Handling two or more calls’  
on page 45.  
Press and hold  
Shortly press  
to mute the microphone during a call.  
again to reactivate the microphone.  
End call – End the active call.  
New call/Hold call/Retrieve call – Put the active call on hold /  
retrieve the held call. This is useful if you want to make a  
new call during a call.  
Call handling with the flip open  
You use the stylus and the virtual keypad to handle calls with the  
flip open.  
Add to contacts – Create a new Contacts entry if the phone  
number of the active call is known, and not already stored in  
Contacts.  
Outgoing calls  
Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that  
corresponds to the phone number of the active call.  
To make a call  
1. Select  
opened.  
in the application picker. The Speed dial view is  
Transfer sound – Transfer the call to a Bluetooth wireless  
technology headset.  
2. Tap  
on the button bar.  
Turn On/Off tones You can send DTMF tones with the  
keypad, ‘Controlling tone-based services’ on page 49.  
3. Enter the numbers with the virtual keypad and tap  
keypad, or press the Jog Dial inwards.  
on the  
Microphone mute On/Off – Turn the microphone on or off.  
To delete a typed character - tap  
. If you do not want to  
Copy number – Copy a phone number to the clipboard.  
show your phone number to the party you are calling, select  
Phone > Hide my number after you have entered the digits.  
Select Show my number, if you want to show it.  
Paste number – Paste a copied number to be used for the next  
call.  
43  
Phone  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If a call is not successfully connected, the P910a can be set to  
automatically retry to connect the call. When a retry is  
successful, the P910a alerts you with a single ring signal.  
2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it  
inwards.  
3. Select a phone number by rotating the Jog Dial.  
4. Press the Jog Dial inwards.  
To make a call using Speed  
dial  
You can also tap the contact and/or number using the stylus.  
P
h
o
ne  
E
it  
d
Speed dial is a fast way to call  
one of your special numbers.  
See ‘Set up speed dial  
Sony Ericsson  
To make a call using voice control  
You use the voice control in the same way as with the flip  
closed. See“To make a call using voice control” on page 41.  
1
2
3
numbers’ on page 48. This is  
the default phone view.  
John  
4
Sandra  
5
Susan(w)  
6
To end a call  
Select End call, or press the Jog Dial.  
1. Select  
bar.  
on the button  
Mike  
7
Julia(h)  
8
Robert  
9
2. Use the Jog Dial or tap with  
the stylus to select an entry.  
Incoming calls  
When you receive a call, if the calling party is found in  
Contacts, the name of the caller will be displayed. If there is a  
picture, it will also be shown in a small or large version. See  
‘Incoming call picture’ on page 52.  
Elizabeth  
Empty  
Empty  
To make a call using the Call  
list  
1. Select  
bar.  
from the button  
To handle an incoming call  
2. Select an entry by rotating the Jog Dial and pressing it  
inwards. You can also tap the entry using the stylus.  
Use the screen buttons to select what to do.  
Answer – Answer the call.  
3. Select  
.
Send Busy – Reject the call. The calling party will hear a busy  
tone and the call will be logged as a rejected call.  
To make a call using the Contact list  
1. Select in the application picker.  
Phone  
44  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Mute – Silence the ring signal. The calling party will not  
notice that you have silenced the call. The call will be logged  
as a missed call.  
Call volume – Adjust the volume in the phone. This is easier to  
do with the Jog Dial.  
Vibrating alert – Set when the vibrating alert should be active.  
You can also answer by voice control, see Voice control’ on  
Silent mode – All sounds, for example ring signals, will be  
page 52.  
turned off.  
Speakerphone – Activate the P910a as a speakerphone.  
Options during or after a call  
Mute microphone – Turn the microphone on or off.  
There are several options available, depending on the situation.  
You can access some of them using the screen buttons, by  
tapping the field with the calling party details, or on the menus.  
Handling two or more calls  
During a call, you can make a second call, or answer an  
incoming call. The ongoing call is put on hold and the new call  
becomes active. The held call is shown with a grey background.  
Options that concern two or more active calls are described in  
‘Handling two or more calls’ on page 45.  
End call – End the active call.  
If someone calls when a call is on hold, you will be asked if you  
want to release the held call and answer the incoming call.  
New call/Hold call/Retrieve call – Put the active call on hold/  
retrieve the held call.  
When an active call is finished, you are asked to retrieve the  
held call. If you do not respond within a few seconds, the held  
call will also be finished.  
Add to contacts – Create a new Contacts entry. This option  
appears automatically after a call if the phone number of the  
call is known, and not already stored in Contacts. See ‘Add to  
contacts’ on page 53.  
Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that  
corresponds to the phone number of the active call.  
Copy number – Copy a phone number to the clipboard.  
Paste number – Paste a copied number into a field  
Tap  
to make the following adjustments:  
45  
Phone  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To make and handle a new call during a call  
Conference calls  
Press  
to get a list of call  
A conference call can be started  
when you have an active call  
and a held call.  
P
h
o
Edit  
ne
handling options with the flip  
closed.  
P
h
o
ne  
E
it  
d
11:03  
11  
:
03  
1
2
3
John Smith  
(w)  
John Smith  
Tom Clark (w)  
Ann Jones (h)  
End active call – End the  
active call, the held call  
becomes active.  
The conference call view is  
automatically displayed  
whenever a party has been  
added to the conference.  
0123456789012(h)  
Switch calls – Switch  
between the active and  
held call.  
Anne Jones (w)  
End conference  
New call  
If an incoming call is answered  
during a conference call, the  
conference call will be put on  
hold.  
End active call  
Switch calls  
Start conference call / Add to  
conference call – Join the  
two calls for a conference  
call.  
Hide parties  
Start conference call  
Note Conference calls are only  
available if they are supported  
by your subscription.  
Transfer calls – Connect  
the held call to the active  
call and disconnect yourself from the call.  
To start a conference call  
With one active call and one held call, tap the Start conference call  
button, or select Phone > Start conference call from the menu.  
Release all – End both calls.  
Show contact – Display the entry in Contacts, if any, that  
corresponds to the phone number of the active call.  
To add a new conference party  
With the flip open, choose options by tapping the screen  
buttons, by tapping the field with the other party’s details, or  
selecting from the menus.  
1. During a conference call, tap New call and make a new call.  
2. Select Add to conference  
.
Phone  
46  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To manage a conference call  
1. Select  
on the standby screen to open the Call list.  
Use the screen buttons:  
2. Press  
and select which calls in the list you want to  
display. The currently selected view is not shown as an  
option.  
End conference – End the conference for all parties.  
Show / Hide parties – Switch between the standard call control  
view and conference call view.  
Tip With the flip closed you can press  
once to view the  
call list. Press twice to call the last number used in the P910a.  
To speak privately to a specific conference party  
Tap a party in the list to get the following options:  
To view the Call log with the flip open:  
1. In the Phone application, select  
from the button bar.  
Extract party – Make the selected party the active call, the rest  
of the parties will be put on hold.  
2. Select a listed call to see more detailed information about it.  
Release party – End the conference call for the selected party.  
To delete calls from the Call list  
To delete all calls, select Phone > Delete all calls.  
Call list and call log  
To delete old calls, select Phone > Delete entries older than >  
Enter a date > Done  
The Call list available with the flip closed shows calls made,  
received, rejected, or missed. with the last dialed call at top.  
To delete one call, open the detailed view on the call > Phone  
> Delete this entry.  
The Call log available with the flip opened keeps track of date,  
time, length, and cost information (if available) for each call. It  
shows all calls in order with the most recent call at the top.  
Hints and smart functions  
To view the Call list with the flip closed:  
1. Press  
.
Speakerphone  
2. Select Call list  
.
If you open the flip during a call, the speakerphone function is  
activated and the volume will increase. This lets you continue  
the conversation while using other functions of the P910a.  
or  
47  
Phone  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Close the flip or tap  
to switch off the speakerphone.  
To set a Speed dial number  
1. Select  
from the button bar.  
Note The speakerphone does not work while the phone is in  
silent mode.  
2. Select an empty position.  
3. Select the desired contact.  
4. Edit the name tag if desired.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure  
to excessive volume may damage hearing.  
5. Select Done  
.
To edit or delete a Speed dial number  
1. Select on the button bar.  
Silent mode  
In silent mode all audible ring and alarm signals are turned off.  
When the flip is closed, press  
and select Turn on silent to  
2. Select Edit > Edit speed dial.  
put the phone in silent mode. Press  
and select Turn off  
3. Select the contact to edit or delete.  
silent to turn off silent mode. When the flip is open, tap the  
sounds icon in the status bar to open a dialog where you can  
switch silent mode on or off.  
4. To change the name, enter the new name.  
To delete a contact, tap Delete.  
5. Select Done  
.
The vibrating alert still works in silent mode if not deactivated.  
Flight mode  
Set up speed dial numbers  
Note The phone and other communication functions must never  
be used in an aircraft unless otherwise instructed by the aircraft  
personnel. If the use of equipment without a radio transmitter is  
permitted, you can turn on the flight mode on the product. Doing  
so turns off the radio function.  
Speed dial is a fast way to call one of nine selected phone  
numbers. The view contains nine speed dial positions. Each  
speed dial entry consists of a picture or an icon, and a name or a  
number. The names, numbers and pictures shown in the Speed  
dial view are derived from the Contacts application, see  
‘Contacts’ on page 100. If the contact has a picture stored then  
this picture is used. A default icon is used if the contact does not  
have a stored picture.  
In flight mode the radio function is turned off so that it does not  
disturb sensitive equipment, for instance in an airplane or in a  
Phone  
48  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
hospital. You cannot make and receive calls, but most of the  
other functions in the P910a are available.  
Controlling tone-based services  
You can use your P910a to control phone banking services or  
other tone-based services that use DTMF (Dual Tone Multi  
Frequency).  
A Power menu asks you if you want to start the P910a in normal  
mode or flight mode each time you turn on the P910a. See  
‘Flight mode’ on page 149 on how to activate and deactivate  
this Power menu.  
The P910a provides different ways of sending tones during a  
call:  
Note You must set the Power menu before the flight.  
Pressing keypad keys during an active call.  
Including a tone sequence in the call setup. Enter the phone  
To use the Power menu  
number, then press and hold  
represented by the character  
to insert a pause,  
. Continue to enter your  
The Power menu has the following options:  
p
Phone on – Start the P910a in the normal way.  
Flight mode – Start the P910a in flight mode.  
Power off – Turn the P910a off.  
numbers for the tone-based code. Finally make the call by  
pressing  
.
Hyperlinks in Messaging and Jotter  
To set flight mode on and off when Power menu is selected  
1. Press the On/Off button.  
When you write text in Messaging and Jotter, your P910a  
interprets a number as a phone number. If you select that  
number, you have the possibility to, for example, call the  
number or send an SMS to it.  
2. On the Power menu, select the option you want.  
3. Press the Jog Dial,  
, or tap Done.  
Your P910a also recognizes email addresses and URLs. If you  
select an email address you have almost the same possibilities as  
for the phone number. If you select an URL, your have the  
possibility to start the Internet browser which opens the  
corresponding Internet page.  
To set flight mode on or off  
1. Select Control panel > Device > Flight mode.  
2. Select Flight mode now / Phone on now  
3. Tap Done  
.
.
49  
Phone  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Write digit sequences into  
a Contact entry for the  
service. Each digit  
To use the TTY device together with the P910a  
1. Connect the TTY device to the accessories connector at the  
base of the P910a.  
C
o
tactsEdit  
n
Unfiled  
Bank  
sequence to be sent as  
2. In Phone, go to Edit > Preferences > TTY Accessory and select  
+4613244500 p1#1234567890  
p10#0#34#56789 balance (w)  
p30#1234#56 account 1 (w)  
p10#1#5678901 account 2 (w)  
p20#123456789 (w)  
tones must begin with  
p. A  
the check box to set the P910a into TTY mode.  
space will end the tone  
sequence and you can add  
a comment after the space.  
Once your call to the  
service has been  
established and you want  
to send one of your pre-  
programmed digit  
sequences, choose Show  
contact on the Phone menu  
to get back to the Contact  
card with the tone  
Refer to the TTY device user manual to find out how to use the  
device. It may be necessary to use an adapter between the TTY  
device and the P910a.  
You can still make normal calls with the P910a in TTY mode  
but other accessories such as handsfree will not work properly.  
Do not open the flip during a TTY call. It will impair the quality  
of the connection.  
Note Support for voice carry over (VCO) and hearing carry  
over (HCO) is handled through the TTY device and not through  
the phone.  
sequences.  
Support for ALS  
Note You should not store any personal codes in your P910a, in  
case your phone is stolen or lost.  
Alternate line service (ALS) allows you to have two lines, and  
two phone numbers, in one subscription. If you are not  
subscribed to ALS, these dialogs and settings are hidden.  
Support for TTY  
Using ALS, you can select which line to use for outgoing calls.  
You can use the first line for any function, while the second line  
can be used for speech only.  
Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is an aid for people with  
speech impairments.  
Phone  
50  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Incoming calls can be received at both lines at any time. The  
name of the line is shown and the ring signal defined for the line  
is used.  
Programmable feature buttons  
Used in a corporate environment, the P910a provides  
programmable feature buttons for easier use of corporate phone  
services. When, for example, you call someone who does not  
answer, you can press the button Call Back to have the corporate  
system call you back as soon as he is free.  
To select a line for outgoing calls  
The preset line is shown by the icon in the status bar. If you want  
to use the other line:  
To report that you are busy, click  
(in standby mode) the PBX icon  
With the flip closed, press  
Switch to line 2 depending on the previously preset line.  
With the flip open, tap and select Switch to line 1 or Switch  
to line 2 depending on the previously preset line.  
and select Switch to line 1 or  
P
h
o
ne dit  
E
> Command to send a  
command to the PBX, such as In  
meeting until..., Course, or  
Business trip. The switchboard  
operator can then answer  
2
Commands  
Select command  
Meeting  
Business trip  
Sick leave  
Corporate phone  
services in P910a  
incoming callers that you are  
busy and when you will be back.  
All those commands that you  
used to dial to the corporate  
switch can now be replaced by a  
command button with clear text.  
Corporate voicemail  
Lunch  
P
honeEdit  
02:00  
?
The P910a can be used in a  
corporate environment like  
centrex, mobile centrex and  
corporate switchboards (PABX)  
equipped with a mobile  
extension facility (like Ericsson  
MD110 or Ericsson  
Gone for the day  
Corporate call  
Vacation  
Course  
John Smith  
+442745551409 (w)  
Cancel  
Using corporate phone  
service  
End call  
New call  
Call back  
Intrude  
To place an internal call, dial an internal (short) number or an  
external (long) number. The phone sets up the call through the  
corporate switch, so that during the call you can utilize all  
corporate features like call back, interrogation, conference and  
switchboard operator services. When dialing an external  
BusinessPhone).  
M
ore  
51  
Phone  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
number, you do not need to dial the external line prefix; it is  
Preferences  
added automatically.  
In this menu you can change the settings for the phone options.  
Note When traveling abroad, use your phone as a normal GSM  
phone, entering Phone > Edit > Preferences> Calling Cards and set  
the calling card to Call directly  
When storing numbers in Contacts you should use the  
international number format, starting with . This allows you to  
(Settings on your P910a that are system-wide and affect more  
than one application are made from the Control panel, see  
‘Control panel’ on page 147).  
.
To set the phone preferences  
+
1. In the Phone program select Edit > Preferences.  
2. Select the item to set up.  
use Contacts when you are outside the corporate telephony  
environment, when you are abroad, and when you are sending  
SMS or MMS messages.  
Incoming calls via the PBX may be routed to the P910a as well  
as to your desk phone, and you can answer in either telephone.  
When talking on the P910a, you may hand over the call to the  
desk phone by calling that phone, answering it and hanging up  
the P910a. You can also hand over a call from the desk phone to  
your P910a.  
Incoming call picture  
If an incoming caller has a picture stored in Contacts it will be  
shown on the screen. Select the checkbox to show a large  
version of the picture over the whole screen.  
Voice control  
Configuring corporate phone service  
The voice control option lets you manage calls using your voice.  
With Voice answer you can use words recorded for ‘answer’ and  
‘busy’ to answer or send a busy signal to an incoming call. With  
Voice dialing, you can make a call by saying the contact’s name.  
Your corporate phone administrator can program feature  
buttons, call routing, and commands in your phone via a  
settings file. Contact him to receive a user guide valid for the  
company and the configuration file, either via email or down  
load from the intranet.  
A magic word ensures that the P910a will not call somebody  
whose name has just been mentioned by chance.  
See “Corporate phone services” on page 56 on how to install  
corporate phone service.  
Say the ‘magic word’ and then the name of the person you want  
to call, and the P910a will try to call the person. Instead of the  
For more information on corporate telephony go to  
www.SonyEricsson.com/professionalsolutions  
Phone  
52  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
magic word you can also press and hold the Jog Dial or press the  
handsfree set call button.  
2. Say the magic word, the answer command or the busy  
command after the tone.  
If you are recording a magic word, make sure that you  
choose a long unusual word, which can easily be  
distinguished from ordinary background speech.  
Note Magic word is not supported with the Bluetooth headset/  
car kit in the P910a. Instead of magic word, push the button on  
the Bluetooth headset. After a confirmation tone, you should say  
the name.  
3. Select Play to check the quality of your recording.  
4. Select Done to exit.  
Voice dialing – Select or unselect the checkbox.  
Magic word – Select the cases where you want to use the  
magic word when you use voice dialing. You must, however,  
record a magic word before you can select to use it. Using  
Magic word will increase battery drain.  
You are advised to record voice commands in a quiet  
environment to maximize recognition.You also have to select  
the voice commands carefully, so it does not activate by mistake  
from environment sounds.  
Voice answer – Select or unselect the checkbox. Tap On if you  
want to answer or reject incoming calls by voice commands.  
You must first record voice commands for Answer and Busy.  
To record voice commands for individual contacts, see  
‘Creating and editing contacts’ on page 103.  
Play caller name – If you have recorded a name for a person in  
Contacts, the P910a will tell you the person’s name when he  
or she calls you. This is useful when using your P910a  
together with a handsfree.  
Add to contacts  
This is a function for adding called and calling parties to  
Contacts. After a call has ended, if the phone number is not  
already stored in the Contacts, you are asked if you would like to  
add it.  
Voice commands – A list of the voice commands. A balloon  
means that a voice command is recorded for the command.  
Set the function On or Off  
.
To record a voice command  
1. Select one of the options, Magic word Answer, or Busy and tap  
,
Handsfree  
Specify how to manage calls when the P910a is used with a  
handsfree kit connected.  
Record  
.
53  
Phone  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Answering mode – Select the option you want.  
The settings are stored in the network. Tap Refresh to receive the  
current settings.  
Normal – Answer calls as normal.  
Any key – Press any key (except  
) on the keypad to  
Tip Normally the data/fax options should not be changed.  
answer.  
seconds.  
Accept calls  
You can specify who should be able to call you. All other callers  
will be rejected. Your options are:  
You can also select to use a Bluetooth headset as the preferred  
sound device. See ‘Pairing’ on page 136 for information on how  
to establish connection with the headset.  
All callers – Everybody can phone you.  
Listed callers only – Only people on the Accept callers list  
Bluetooth: Preferred Handsfree – Select the option you want.  
can phone you.  
Phone – Use the keypad to manage incoming and outgoing  
calls.  
Contacts – Only people in your Contacts address book can  
phone you.  
Headset – Use the headset or the keypad to manage  
incoming and outgoing calls.  
Speed dial list – Only people in your Speed dial list can  
phone you.  
No one – No one can phone you. You can still receive  
messages such as SMS, MMS and email.  
Forward calls  
You can forward incoming calls to another number if for any  
reason you are unable to answer them.  
To add a contact to the Accepted list  
1. Select Add new.  
To forward calls  
2. Select Lookup and choose a contact, or write the name and  
number of the contact.  
1. Select the type of call you want to forward.  
2. Specify the phone number you want to forward to.  
3. Select Done  
.
3. Select Done  
.
Tap a contact on the list to remove it.  
Phone  
54  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Call waiting  
Voicemail  
Use these settings to control how P910a handles incoming calls  
during an ongoing call.  
For easy voicemail access, enter the number of your voicemail  
box.  
On You will be alerted by incoming calls.  
With the flip closed, press and hold  
to call this number.  
Off – The P910a sends a busy tone to the calling party.  
With the flip open, select Phone > Call voicemail  
.
Note It is possible to include DTMF tones in the number. Insert  
before the tones.  
Restrict calls  
a
p
You can set restrictions for calls made from or to your P910a.  
You can, for example, protect it from being used for long-  
distance calls.  
Calling cards  
Calling cards are used together with some phone services, which  
means that calls are set up via a calling card server. These  
settings specify how P910a handles calling cards. Most Calling  
card settings are protected by the Device lock, see ‘Device lock’  
on page 38.  
To restrict incoming calls  
1. Select the Incoming tab.  
2. Set restrictions for:  
– All incoming calls.  
Calling card mode – Select how to use the selected calling  
– Incoming calls when roaming. Use this to avoid costs for  
incoming calls when traveling abroad.  
card.  
Calling cards – A list of your calling cards.  
To restrict outgoing calls  
Selected card – Select which of your calling cards you  
want to use.  
1. Select the Outgoing tab.  
2. Set restrictions for:  
Please consult your calling card supplier for more details.  
– All outgoing calls.  
To create a new calling card  
Select New and enter the account information.  
– Outgoing international calls.  
– Outgoing international calls except to your home country.  
55  
Phone  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Access tab:  
Corporate phone services  
You set up corporate phone services by importing a .pbx type  
settings file from your corporate IT-manager. This file can be  
received via email, stored on the Memory Stick or downloaded  
from Internet.  
Name – Enter a name for the calling card account.  
Access number – Enter the phone number of the calling  
card server.  
Verification code – Enter the verification code.  
Note Make sure the file is authentic before you import it.  
International prefix – Enter the international prefix used by  
the server.  
To set up corporate phone services  
Set up tab:  
1. Place the file in the Document > Unfiled folder of the P910a or  
Sending order  
Number then code means that the P910a,  
the Memory Stick.  
after you have connected to the server, first sends the  
phone number you have entered, and then sends the  
verification number. Code then number means the opposite  
order.  
2. Select Edit > Preferences > Calling cards and enter your device  
lock code.  
3. Tap Import  
.
Delay for number/code – Set a time delay between the  
moment the calling card answers the call and the P910a  
starts sending tones.  
4. Select the settings pbx file and tap Import  
.
5. Select the card among the imported cards in the Selected card  
control.  
Some international calling card services instruct their users to  
select a language by pressing a digit. When using the P910a  
calling card feature, you can insert such a digit in one of these  
places:  
6. Activate the card by setting the Calling Card Mode to either  
Always use calling card or Prompt before call  
.
Incoming call behavior  
Immediately after the access number, but preceded by a  
pause sign,  
When you answer a call when the flip is open the default  
behavior is for the P910a to switch to the phone program. Select  
the check box if you prefer to stay in the ongoing program when  
you answer a call with the flip open.  
p.  
In the verification code.  
In the phone number that you dial.  
Phone  
56  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Not all networks provide charging information to the phone  
GPRS Alert  
during a call. If your network provides this service and your  
If you make a new telephone call you can interrupt an ongoing  
subscription is for Advice of Charge Charging, you cannot make  
GPRS session, for example, an incoming email. Select the check  
or receive any chargeable calls if you are roaming in a network  
box to get a warning in such a case.  
that does not provide charging information.  
TTY Accessory  
ALS settings (subscription dependent)  
Select the check box when you want to use the P910a together  
Use Alternate Line Service to make calls on two lines with  
with a TTY accessory. Teletype (TTY) accessory, text phone, is  
separate phone numbers. Some of the phone settings are used on  
an aid for deaf and speech-impaired people.  
a per line basis. In most cases, the settings displayed apply to the  
selected line. This is then indicated in the dialog title bar. In  
other cases, the lines correspond to separate settings or tabs in  
the dialogs.  
AoC - Call meter settings  
Advice of Charge allows you to keep track of the cost of calls  
and to stop the P910a from making chargeable calls when a  
certain credit limit has been exceeded. The Advice of Charge  
option only appears in the list if it is supported by your current  
subscription.  
To set the line tags  
1. Select the ALS settings dialog.  
2. Edit the names for line 1 and 2.  
If the credit is limited, a Low credit warning is displayed, when  
there is approximately thirty seconds of credit left. When the  
credit runs out, Credit expired is displayed and ongoing,  
chargeable calls are stopped.  
3. Tap Done.  
Please refer to the Help system for detailed information about  
the Call meter settings.  
Note PIN2 is required from your network operator for storing  
any changes you make to the Call meter settings.  
57  
Phone  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
MEDIA  
CommuniCorder  
With the built-in CommuniCorder camera you can record video  
clips and take pictures, view them on your phone screen and  
send them directly to friends or colleagues via multimedia  
messaging. You can also send the video clips and pictures you  
have saved in your P910a via messaging, infrared  
communication or Bluetooth wireless technology to, for  
example, a PC. It is also possible to exchange video clips and  
pictures between the P910a and the Web.  
Still camera  
Still camera  
Still camera  
Indoor  
Set for indoor light  
Set for outdoor light  
Outdoor  
Message  
picture  
Set for picture size 160x120  
pixels  
Video camera Message  
video  
Set for video clips to be  
appended to messages  
The pictures in your P910a can be set as background, wallpaper,  
or they can be added to the contacts in your phonebook. See  
‘Personalizing your P910a’ on page 144 to find out more about  
using pictures.  
Recording video clips  
You can record a video clip with the flip open as well as closed.  
To record a video clip  
A button  
on the camera activates the  
1. Press the camera button  
application.  
to activate the CommuniCorder  
CommuniCorder application and acts as the  
shutter release when taking pictures.  
2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the Video mode or  
Message video if the video clip is to be sent in an MMS.  
The Jog Dial is used to set the  
CommuniCorder working mode:  
3. Press again to start recording. The status indicator flashes red  
during the recording.  
Video camera Video  
Automatic setting  
4. Press the Jog Dial to stop recording. The video clip is  
Still camera  
Still camera  
Auto  
Automatic setting  
automatically saved in Video  
.
Night  
Set for dark environment  
CommuniCorder  
58  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
You can also press the Jog Dial, or, when the flip is open, tap the  
To delete a video clip you have just recorded in flip closed,  
capture button  
video clip.  
at the bottom of the screen to record a  
select Delete clip from the flip closed context menu.  
To manage video clips, tap  
to go directly to Video. See  
By default the video clips you record are stored internally in the  
Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to  
change the storage location to another location, for example, on  
a Memory Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 28 for more information  
on using folders.  
‘Video’ on page 67 for more information.  
Delay timer  
CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds.  
The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the  
shutter release and the moment when the recording starts.  
To send a video clip you have just recorded in flip closed, select  
Send as MMS from the flip closed context menu. In flip open, tap  
To set the delay time  
.
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences.  
Note Most operators only accept video clips of 10 seconds  
length or 95 KB size.Use the Message video mode, or the Video  
limit setting in Video mode to limit the file size.  
2. Tap  
and set the desired delay time  
To record video with delay timer  
Open the flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder  
settings. With the flip open, the CommuniCorder is activated by  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer.  
2. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and  
a timer icon is shown before the recording is started.  
selecting  
>
.
To delete the last video clip  
When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon  
.
1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete clip  
.
2. Confirm the delete operation.  
3. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer.  
59  
CommuniCorder  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
a Memory Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 28 for more information  
on using folders.  
Video status  
Above the viewfinder, you will find the video status. Icons show  
whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, video quality, and  
audio quality. A number indicates how much time you have left.  
The calculation is based on the current settings plus available  
space on the storage location you have selected (internal or the  
Memory Stick).  
To send a picture you have just taken in flip closed, select Send  
as MMS from the flip closed context menu. In flip open, tap  
.
Open the flip to access the full range of CommuniCorder  
settings. With the flip open, you activate the CommuniCorder  
by selecting  
>
or pressing the camera button  
.
Taking pictures  
To view the last picture  
You can take a picture with the flip open as well as closed.  
1. Select CommuniCorder > View picture  
.
2. Select Done to return.  
To take a picture  
1. Press the camera button  
application.  
to activate the CommuniCorder  
To delete the last picture  
1. Select CommuniCorder > Delete picture  
.
2. Rotate, if required, the Jog Dial to the desired mode.  
2. Select Delete to delete the picture.  
3. Press again to capture the image on the screen. The picture is  
To delete a picture you have just taken in flip closed, select  
Delete picture from the flip closed context menu.  
automatically saved in Pictures  
.
You can also press the Jog Dial, the  
flip is open, tap the capture button  
screen to take a picture.  
button, or when the  
at the bottom of the  
To manage or edit the picture, tap  
See also ‘Pictures and Image editor’ on page 63.  
to go directly to Pictures  
.
By default the pictures you take are stored internally in the  
Unfiled folder. Tap the folder menu to the right in the menu bar to  
change the storage location to another location, for example, on  
CommuniCorder  
60  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
status, picture size and picture quality. A number indicates how  
many pictures you have left. The calculation is based on the  
current settings plus available space on the storage location you  
have selected (internal or the Memory Stick).  
Delay timer  
CommuniCorder has a delay timer with a delay of 1-25 seconds.  
The delay time is the time between the moment you activate the  
shutter release and the moment when the picture is taken.  
To set the delay time and the picture freeze time  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences.  
2. Tap  
and set the desired delay time.  
In this dialog box you can also set the picture freeze time. This  
specifies the time the picture stays unchanged in the screen after  
you have taken it.  
To take a picture with delay timer  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer.  
3. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for the set time and  
a timer icon is shown before the picture is taken.  
When the delay timer is set, you will see the timer status icon  
.
4. Tap CommuniCorder > Delay timer to deactivate the timer.  
Image status  
Above the viewfinder, you will find the image status. Icons  
show whether the CommuniCorder is ready or busy, delay timer  
61  
CommuniCorder  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The icons in the upper right corner of the main view reflect the  
Camera settings  
quality and size settings of the pictures and video clips and also  
You may want to change some of these settings if, for example  
the sound quality of video clips.  
you are taking a picture in daylight or in dark surroundings. You  
can also choose what resolution, size and quality, you want for  
the pictures you take.  
To restore default CommuniCorder preferences  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences  
2. Tap Default  
3. Tap Yes  
.
Note Depending on which mode you are using, some settings  
may be fixed (and not user adjustable).  
.
.
To change preferences for the camera  
1. Tap CommuniCorder > Preferences  
.
2. Select the setting you want to change:  
Move the slider to change the brightness of the picture.  
Move the slider to change the contrast.  
Turn the backlight On when the light behind the subject is  
brighter than the light in front of the subject.  
Turn the flicker free function On to reduce the effects of  
flicker from, for example, fluorescent light.  
Choose white balance according to the lighting conditions  
you are in when taking the picture.  
For pictures, choose quality and size. The picture sizes,  
640x480, 320x240 and 160x120, are displayed in pixels.  
For video, choose quality for video and audio.  
Larger size and higher quality use more memory.  
Choose delay time and freeze time for the still camera, and  
delay time and Video limit for video.  
CommuniCorder  
62  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Pictures and Image editor  
In Pictures you can manage all pictures saved in your P910a.  
The pictures can be taken using the CommuniCorder or received  
via Messages, Bluetooth wireless technology or infrared  
communication. They can also be downloaded via the browser  
or transferred from your PC via a cable. Your P910a supports  
JPEG, GIF, MBM, PNG, WBMP and BMP picture formats. In  
the Image editor you can perform basic editing of JPEG  
pictures.  
The thumbnail view gives an overview of all the pictures in your  
P910a while the list view shows a more compact list. At the  
bottom of the screen you can see how many pictures you have  
saved in the current folder.  
Tip To take a new picture, tap  
to go to the CommuniCorder  
.
Move among the pictures with the arrow buttons or Jog Dial.  
You can search for specific pictures and sort your pictures by  
name, date, size or type. Tap Edit to choose how to sort the  
pictures.  
Pictures  
P
i
c
t
uresEdit  
All  
You can send the pictures to  
others, add them to the contacts  
in your phonebook, or use one as  
a background image (wallpaper)  
or screensaver.  
Detail view  
Tap a picture or select it with the Jog Dial to open it. Specify in  
Edit > Preferences if pictures should open in detail view or full  
screen view.  
Brioney  
Mer de gla...  
In the detail view, you can rename your pictures and sort them  
into folders. This makes it easier for you to keep track of your  
pictures. Read more about organizing files in ‘Folders’ on  
page 28.  
Thumbnail and list  
views  
Tap  
and  
to change  
Wakeboard  
Mont Blanc  
between the thumbnail view and  
the list view.  
12 pictures (890Kb)  
Pictures and Image editor  
63  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To rename a picture  
Zooming pictures, widescreen and full  
screen  
P
i
c
t
uresEdit  
Photos  
1. Select Pictures > Rename picture  
.
From the detail view of the picture you can:  
2. Enter a picture name > Done  
.
Tap  
and  
to zoom in and out.  
Note Two or more pictures  
cannot have the same name.  
Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in  
the picture.  
At the bottom of the screen you  
can see the picture information,  
for example, the size of the  
picture and the date the picture  
was taken.  
Tap a picture to display it in widescreen. Tap it again to  
display it in fullscreen. Tap and drag the picture to view  
specific details. Tap once more to zoom in. Return to the  
detail view by tapping, or pressing the Jog Dial backwards.  
JPG-0002  
10:15am,21/06/04  
Rotate the Jog Dial to browse the pictures in widescreen  
view.  
Use  
move between the pictures in the  
current folder. takes you back  
to the thumbnail or list view.  
and  
or the Jog Dial to  
Moving, copying and deleting  
From the detail view of the picture you can:  
Sending and receiving pictures  
Select a folder from the folders menu to move the picture to  
that folder (internal or on a Memory Stick). See ‘Folders’ on  
page 28 for more information.  
Select Pictures > Send as to send pictures to other phones or to a  
PC via multimedia messaging, IR or Bluetooth. See ‘Sending  
and receiving items’ on page 30. You can also save pictures that  
you have received via email and multimedia messages. See  
‘Incoming multimedia messages’ on page 90 and ‘Receiving  
attachments’ on page 95.  
Select Pictures > Copy to to copy the picture to another folder  
(internal or on a Memory Stick).  
Select Pictures > Delete picture to delete it.  
Select Pictures > Copy picture to copy the picture to a clipboard  
Pictures in JPEG can also be imported/exported from/to a  
memory card.  
so that you can paste it into an item in another application.  
Note Pictures with Forward lock cannot be sent further.  
64  
Pictures and Image editor  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To copy, delete or move multiple pictures  
Editing pictures  
Editing is controlled from the toolbar below the picture. Tapping  
the tool icons will bring up a palette with choices:  
In the thumbnail and list views, select the check boxes beside  
the picture names. Then select Pictures > the command you  
want.  
Zoom in  
To copy and delete pictures you can also use the Storage  
Manager found in the Control panel. For more information,  
refer to ‘Folders’ on page 28.  
Zoom out  
Select color  
Select pen  
Select  
drawing tool - Pen for freehand drawing  
- Undo last action  
Select one of the 16 colors  
Select one of the 4 pen sizes  
Select one of the tools:  
Image editor  
Using the Image editor, you  
can edit JPEG images.  
- Undo all actions  
Image editor Edit  
- Add text  
- Crop picture  
You can  
crop and resize the pictures  
- Resize picture  
Select rotation Select rotation – clockwise or anti-clockwise  
rotate them by 90° at a  
time  
You can save the edited image by selecting Image editor > Done  
.
write and draw on them,  
using different colors  
Copy and paste by selecting Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste. You can  
only copy and paste whole pictures.  
To start the Image editor  
From a picture opened in  
Pictures, select Edit > Edit  
If you make an error when editing the picture, you can undo the  
last change by Edit > Undo. You can also undo all actions since  
the picture was saved, by selecting Edit > Undo all  
.
picture  
.
Pictures and Image editor  
65  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To zoom in and out  
You can return to the text editor by tapping on the text item.  
This is not available in all formats.  
Note As soon as you tap outside the text item, the text is merged  
Tap  
to zoom in.  
with the picture and cannot be edited or moved.  
Tap and drag the zoomed picture to view specific details in  
the picture.  
To crop a picture  
1. Tap  
and select the cropping tool  
.
Tap  
to zoom out.  
A frame with 8 handles is placed around the picture.  
Select Edit > Zoom, and select between Fit to screen and Full  
2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define how the picture  
should be cropped.  
size  
.
To draw on a picture  
1. If desired, tap  
2. If desired, tap  
3. Tap anywhere, except on the handles, to crop the picture.  
and select the desired color.  
To resize a picture  
and select the desired pen size.  
and select the pen tool .  
1. Tap  
and select the resizing tool  
.
3. Tap  
A frame with four handles is placed around the picture.  
4. Draw with the stylus on the picture.  
2. Tap and drag one of the handles to define the new size of the  
picture.  
To add text to a picture  
When you lift the stylus, the picture will be resized.  
1. Tap  
and select the text tool  
.
2. Tap the place where the text should be put on the picture.  
3. Enter the text in the text field.  
4. If required, change the text properties, using the choices on  
the text, style and colors tabs.  
5. Tap Done to place the text on the picture.  
You can move the text on the picture by tapping and dragging  
on the text.  
66  
Pictures and Image editor  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Video  
You can play video clips that are recorded with the  
CommuniCorder, stored in your P910a or streamed. A video clip  
Video clips  
is a short video sequence. You can also play audio-only material  
which is encapsulated within an MPEG file or streamed. You  
can download video clips from an Internet site or transfer them  
from a PC via a cable, or from a Memory Stick. You can also  
exchange video clips with other phones or PCs via infrared  
communication, Bluetooth wireless technology or multimedia  
messaging.  
Playing video clips  
The Video player opens in the list view. In this view, you get an  
overview of all the MPEG-4 video clips in your P910a. You can  
search for specific video clips, zoom the video clip names and  
sort them by name, date, or size. At the bottom of the screen you  
can see how many video clips you have saved in your P910a.  
You do not have to download a complete video clip to be able to  
view it. You can use the streaming function and view the video  
clip from the Web site where it is located. The video clip is  
played with only a short time delay.  
To view a video clip  
1. Select  
>
Video.  
2. Select a video clip in the list.  
The video player supports files in the MPEG-4 file format, for  
example name.mp4.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you  
are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume  
levels may damage hearing.  
You can store video clips both internally and externally. You can  
also copy them between the internal memory and the Memory  
Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 28.  
While a video clip plays, tap the screen to display the video clip  
in widescreen. Tap the screen again to go back. Specify the  
To adjust the volume  
Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to  
decrease the volume.  
screen orientation in Edit > Preferences > Display  
.
Video  
67  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To copy, delete or move multiple video clips  
In this view you can send,  
rename, delete or move your  
video clips. Only the video  
clips saved in your P910a or  
on the Memory Stick (that is  
not streamed) can be handled  
in the detail view.  
In the list view, select the video clips you want to delete,  
move or copy, by selecting the check boxes beside the picture  
names. Then select Video > the command you want.  
V
i
d
e
o E
d
i
t
Sports  
Diving in the ocean  
To delete you can also use the Storage manager found in the  
Control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Folders’ on  
page 28.  
To rename a video clip  
To sort the video clips  
Select Edit and choose how you want to sort the video clips in  
the current folder.  
1. Select Video > Rename clip  
.
2. Enter a video clip name  
>
Done  
.
To record a clip using the CommuniCorder  
Two or more video clips  
cannot have the same  
name.  
Press the camera button  
CommuniCorder application.  
view.  
or select  
to activate the  
Playing  
0:09  
takes you back to the list  
Tip Use the Folder function  
to organize all your video  
clips.  
Managing video clips  
The detail view is intended for managing one clip at a time. You  
can play and pause the clip by tapping and , and stop by  
tapping  
To copy the current video clip to another folder, select Video >  
Copy to, then select a folder from the list.  
.
To view the video clip information  
The slider under the video area shows the current play position  
within the clip. Tap and drag the slider to move to another  
position.  
Select Video > Info  
.
68  
Video  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete a video clip  
Streaming  
1. Select the video clip you want to delete.  
Streaming is a data transfer method making multimedia  
2. Select Video > Delete clips  
.
available in real-time. You can, for example, listen to audio and  
watch video almost at the same time as it is sent.  
Saving video clips  
The data in the file is divided into small packets that are sent in a  
continuous flow, a stream.You can then begin viewing the file  
from the beginning as the rest of the packets are sent. The short  
delay at the start is to enable a small amount of data to be  
buffered.  
When you play video clips that you have received via email or  
multimedia messaging, or that you have downloaded to your  
P910a from the Web, the viewer detail view is automatically  
launched. From the viewer detail view you can then save the  
video clip to your P910a.  
Your P910a can receive streaming multimedia.  
To save a video clip from another application  
Applications  
1. Select the video clip you want to save.  
Streaming applications can be classified into on-demand and  
live applications.  
2. Select Video > Save clip  
.
3. Select the folder you want to save the video clip in > Save  
.
Examples of on-demand applications are:  
Sending and receiving video clips  
You can send and receive video clips using Video > Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 30.  
Streaming of music.  
Streaming of news (video and audio).  
Streaming of movie trailers.  
Streaming and download of video.  
Live streaming of music or video (broadcast).  
Video  
69  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
How to connect to a streaming service  
Preferences  
If you know the URL of the streaming service:  
When you view a video clip in full screen mode, you can select  
the orientation of the picture  
1. Select Video > Open location  
.
2. Enter the URL of the streaming service, or select a service  
from the drop-down list.  
To change the orientation of the picture in full screen mode  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
3. Tap Done  
.
2. Select the Display tab.  
If you do not know the URL of the streaming service:  
3. Tap Left-handed or Right-handed orientation > Done  
.
1. Open Internet and browse to the site where the service is.  
When you view a video clip from a Web site, using the  
streaming function, a media buffer is used to provide a steady  
flow of data. Increasing the size of the media buffer may  
improve the play-back of the video clip.  
2. Select the item you want to play, for example a video.  
The site server will download part of the video to the P910a  
buffer memory. This will take a short while. When the buffer  
memory is filled, the Video player will open the detail view,  
described above, and play the video seamlessly.  
To change the media buffer size  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the Buffering tab.  
3. Select Custom setting and move the slider left or right > Done  
.
When you download a video clip to your P910a, it is saved in  
the download cache memory. When this memory is full, you  
have to empty it to be able to download new video clips to your  
P910a.  
To clear the download cache  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the Buffering tab.  
70  
Video  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
3. Select Clear Cache > Done  
.
When you view a video clip from a Web site, you may have to  
set the proxy settings.  
To change the proxy settings  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
2. Select the Proxy tab.  
If the proxy settings set in the control panel are to be used,  
tap Automatic configuration  
.
If the manual settings are to be used, enter the relevant  
information.  
Video  
71  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Music player  
Your P910a has mobile music in the form of a stereo music  
player. With the music player you can listen to single music  
tracks or entire folders with tracks. You can download tracks to  
your P910a from a PC, the Internet or Memory Stick, and create  
different folders with tracks. Your P910a supports a number of  
different sound files, including the popular MP3 format. See  
‘Technical data’ on page 198 for more information on supported  
file types.  
If you navigate to the standby screen while you play music, you  
can press  
to pause. Press it again to play.  
Press  
to go back to the standby screen and launch another  
application. The music will still play. If this application requires  
dedicated audio, the playback will be paused.  
If you use the Music player a lot, it can be useful to create flip  
closed and flip open shortcuts to it. This way you can quickly  
access the Music player when you for example want to adjust  
the volume or change track folder. Refer to ‘Application  
shortcuts’ on page 147 for more information.  
You can store sound files both internally and on the Memory  
Stick. You can also copy them between the internal memory and  
the Memory Stick. See ‘Folders’ on page 28.  
Jog Dial control  
Rotate the Jog Dial to select a sound track. Press it inwards to  
play. Press it again to stop.  
When you receive a phone call while listening, the playback will  
be paused. When you end the call, you must navigate back to the  
Music application to restart playing.  
Tip To listen to more music you can store music on several  
To adjust the volume  
Memory Sticks and carry them with you.  
Rotate the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to  
decrease the volume.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear, or if you  
are using the stereo headset. Exposure to excessive volume  
levels may damage hearing.  
Playing sound files  
You can play MP3 music both in flip closed and in flip open. In  
flip closed, with the Jog Dial, select  
select the track you want to play. Press  
commands.  
, select Music player, and  
to find other  
Music player  
72  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To play a list randomly  
Track-folder view  
Select Music > Random  
.
This view is intended for  
playing entire folders with  
MP3 files. In the track-folder  
Music Edit  
All  
Sony Ericsson  
Managing sound files  
view you can  
Play,  
Pause, and  
Stop the  
0:00/3:35  
playback of the current folder,  
and see the duration of the  
track. Selecting a track and  
File list view  
In the file list view you can  
see how many tracks you  
have in the current folder.  
Tapping a file name will open  
the detail view, and allow you  
to play and manage that file.  
Music Edit  
All  
Aeroplane  
tapping  
will play the  
Aeroplane  
Beautiful Night  
Rooster  
Song for you  
Sony Ericsson theme  
Standing Still  
Beautiful Night  
Rooster  
selected track and all the  
following tracks in the folder.  
Use the slider to move  
forwards and backwards in  
the track. Select Music >  
Manage tracks to move to the  
file list view.  
Song for you  
Sony Ericsson theme  
Standing Still  
Stuck with You...  
Walk on  
To copy, delete or move  
multiple files, select the files  
you want to delete, move or  
copy, by selecting the check  
boxes beside the file names.  
Then select Music > the  
Loop and random  
With the loop function you can decide if you want to listen to  
the tracks in the current folder only once, or if you want to loop  
them until you manually stop the play-back. Select the random  
function to play the tracks randomly.  
command you want.  
8 tracks (6806 KB)  
To delete you can also use the  
Storage manager found in the  
Control panel. For more information, refer to ‘Folders’ on  
page 28.  
To loop a list  
Select Music > Loop  
.
Tap  
to move directly to the track-folder view.  
73  
Music player  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete a track from the P910a  
Detail view  
1. Select Music > Delete track  
.
The detail view is intended for managing one file at a time. Tap  
a file name to open the detail view. You can also play and pause  
2. Select Yes  
.
the file by tapping  
and  
.
Viewer  
In the detail view you can move tracks between your different  
folders using the folder function, or rename or delete them.  
If you play sound tracks remotely, for example music on an  
Internet site, a view similar to the detail view displays. The  
commands you find in this view are similar to those in the Detail  
view.  
The detail view displays the  
name of the track, the artist’s  
name, the album title, the  
track number, the copyright  
year, the sound file type and  
the duration of the track.  
Music Edit  
Aeroplane  
Artist:  
Unfiled  
Managing track folders  
In the track-folder view, the Music player plays the MP3 files of  
the selected folder. (With one exception, the All folder. If you  
select this folder, all MP3 files in all music folders will be  
played.) Using the folder function you can create new folders  
for sound tracks. You can create folders on the Memory Stick.  
You can also use several Memory Sticks for your music, for  
example.  
Album:  
Note The amount of  
information displayed  
depends on how much  
information is available on  
the sound file.  
Filename:  
Aeroplane  
Date and Size:  
6:02pm, 21/06/04  
2107KB  
Duration:  
3:35  
Move between the tracks in  
the current folder using the  
In any Music player view, you can create a new folder using the  
Edit Folders command in the folder menu. Then you move or  
copy your sound files to the new folder. You can add more  
folders with sounds as long as there is memory available. You  
can also sort the files using commands in the Edit menu.  
0:00  
and  
buttons.  
To rename a track  
1. Select Music > Rename track  
.
2. Enter a track name and tap Done  
.
Two or more tracks cannot have the same name.  
Music player  
74  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Preferences  
You can choose if you want all types of sound files to be  
displayed in the file list view, or if you want to display only a  
certain type of sound file.  
To select sound file types  
1. Select Edit > Preferences from the file list view.  
2. Check the boxes next to the sound files you want to include  
in the track folders and tap Done  
.
Saving sound files  
When you receive sound files in other applications, such as  
email and multimedia messages, you activate the viewer in your  
P910a. From the viewer you can then save the sound file  
to your P910a.  
To save a track from another application  
1. Tap the save (floppy disk) icon or select Music and tap Save  
.
2. Select the folder you want to save the track in and tap Save  
.
Sending and receiving sound files  
You can send and receive sound files using Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 30.  
75  
Music player  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Internet  
You use  
Internet, the P910a browser, to:  
services it might be necessary to set up a WAP account in the  
Control panel as well. See ‘Getting started with Internet and  
Messages’ on page 172.  
Connect to the Internet to view and access Web and WAP  
pages.  
Receive and view Push messages from your WAP service  
provider.  
To start the browser Start the browser by:  
– pressing the Internet button.  
Download Java applications, images and audio.  
– selecting  
in the application picker.  
in the application  
– selecting  
launcher  
The browser can open Web pages that use Java script or frames,  
but functions that use Java script in the Web page will not work  
properly.  
.
– selecting a URL in another application.  
Note If required, you have to enter your username and  
password to log in to your Internet account.  
You can save bookmarks to viewed pages, to be able to access  
them easily. You can also save pages in the P910a for off-line  
viewing.  
While opening a page, the P910a might not receive incoming  
calls. However, when the page is properly opened you can  
receive a call and the page will still be open.  
The browser uses folders for categorizing information. The  
folders used are bookmarks, saved pages, signed documents,  
and Push messages.  
The application has two views:  
Push messages is a service that gives you notifications about, for  
example, weather forecasts, sport results, and stock quotes. The  
notification is sent to you as a message that contains a WAP link  
to the site with the information you subscribe to.  
Browser view The base view of the application, where you can  
view Web and WAP pages.  
Bookmarks  
view  
A list view where you can save shortcuts:  
• to Web and WAP sites on the Internet  
• to locally stored pages  
Before you can use Internet, you need to set up an Internet  
account in the Control panel. If you intend to use certain WAP  
• to documents digitally signed by you.  
Internet  
76  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Browser view options  
Using the browser view  
Internet menu  
The P910a can display the  
Internet page in normal view  
or full screen view. Use the  
Internet button to change  
between the views. In full  
screen view, press the Jog Dial  
forwards to display a menu  
with the most frequently used  
commands.  
Open page – Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down  
list.  
0:03  
K
J
A
B
Add to bookmarks – Enter the name of the bookmark and  
select the folder to save it in.  
I
n
te  
r
ne  
t
dit  
E
Save page – Enter the name of the page and select the  
folder to save it in.  
Send as – Send the current URL via text or multimedia  
message, email, Infrared, or Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
H
G
C
Sony Ericsson  
D
E
Find – Enter text and search for the text in the page.  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Internet menu.  
Find next – Search for the next occurrence of the search  
text.  
Edit menu.  
Go to the next page.  
Go to the previous page.  
Scan text – Go to the area with the greatest amount of text.  
Back – Move back to the previously viewed page.  
Reload page – Reload the page.  
F
Shift between the browser view and the bookmarks view.  
Disconnect or get information about the connection.  
Go to the home page.  
Load all images – Load all images of the page.  
Page information – Show the page information.  
Bookmarks – Open the bookmark view.  
G
H
J
Stop loading the page.  
A secure connection is established.  
Progress bar, shows the loading progress.  
Edit menu  
K
Cut – Cut out the marked information from an input field.  
Copy – Copy the marked information.  
Copy all – Copy all information on the page.  
77  
Internet  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Paste – Paste the copied text into the selected field.  
Full screen – Expand the browser view.  
Scan text function – Press the Jog Dial inwards (when no  
link is selected) to scan the page for text. The screen will  
navigate to the area with the greatest amount of text.  
Repeat the operation to find the next greatest area of text  
Narrow layout – Adjust web page to screen width.  
Zoom – Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large.  
Preferences – Set the preferences of the browser.  
Help – View help on Internet.  
Short forwards – In Normal view, change between the  
Internet and the Edit menus. In full screen view, show a  
menu with the most frequently used commands.  
Internet button  
Context-sensitive menus  
The context-sensitive menu is opened when you keep the stylus  
pressed on a link or a picture.  
Full screen – When you have opened an Internet page,  
press the Internet button to display the page in full screen.  
Normal browser view – Press the Internet button again to go  
Text link and picture link  
back.  
Open link – Open the active link.  
Handles on the screen – Use the handles on the screen to scroll:  
Link information – Show information on the link.  
Scroll up and down – Tap the handle to the right of the  
Add to bookmarks – Add the active link URL to the  
bookmark list.  
screen and drag it up or down.  
Scroll left and right – Tap the handle at the bottom of the  
Loaded picture (with or without link)  
screen and drag it to the left or to the right.  
Save image – Save the picture in the P910a.  
Jog Dial  
Copy image – Copy the picture to the clipboard.  
One hand navigation – In an open page, rotate the Jog Dial  
View image – View the picture adapted to the screen  
(enlarged or reduced).  
slowly to go to next link. Press the Jog Dial inwards to  
select the link.  
Send image as – Send the picture as text or multimedia  
message, email, infrared, or Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
Scroll up and down – In an open page, rotate the Jog Dial  
fast to scroll up and down.  
Internet  
78  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Not loaded picture (with or without link)  
To navigate through recently opened pages  
Load image – Load the picture.  
1. Select  
2. Select  
to move back to previously viewed pages.  
to move forwards again.  
Voice call link  
Call – Place a call according to the link.  
To save a page for off-line browsing  
New SMS – Send an SMS message according to the link.  
New MMS – Send an MMS message according to the link.  
New contact – Create a contact with the link information.  
1. Select Internet > Save page  
.
2. Change the page name, if required, and select a folder to save  
it in.  
Mail to link  
3. Select Done.  
New email – Send an email according to the link.  
New MMS – Send an MMS message according to the link.  
To create a bookmark to the open page  
New contact – Create a contact with the link information.  
1. Select Internet > Add to bookmarks.  
2. Change the bookmark name, if required, and select a folder  
to save it in.  
Icons within a page  
Picture not loaded (can be loaded manually).  
3. Select Done.  
Damaged picture (not possible to load).  
To download and upload files, for example, applications  
Note If images are not loaded, select the picture icons  
When you select a link to a downloadable file, for example,  
applications, images and so on, information on the file is  
displayed.  
or select Internet > Load all images.  
To open a specific Web page  
Select Yes to start the download.  
1. Select Internet > Open page.  
2. Enter the page URL or select a previously viewed page from  
the drop-down list.  
When you select a link for uploading a file, a form for  
submitting the file is displayed.  
3. Select Open.  
Select the file and select Yes to start the upload.  
79  
Internet  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To view information on the open page  
User authentication request  
Whenever a user authentication is requested, you have the  
possibility to either select a certificate and confirm the user  
authentication, to select to continue anonymously or to cancel  
the connection.  
1. Select Internet > Page information.  
2. Select the Content tab to view the page information.  
3. Select the Connection tab to view information on the  
connection.  
If Connect anonymously has been set, the browser will instead  
automatically try to connect anonymously.  
4. Select the Certificates button to view the information on:  
– Server  
– User  
Using the bookmark view  
To disconnect from the Internet  
A
1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD  
in the status bar.  
or GPRS  
)
B
A
B
C
D
Folder menu.  
Edit menu.  
C
D
I
n
te  
r
ne  
t
E
dit  
All  
2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu  
Search Internet  
My home page  
SonyEricsson  
News  
Internet menu.  
3. The dialog Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears.  
4. Select Yes  
Select an icon to view  
information on the bookmark.  
.
Webmail  
E
Project home  
711 time table  
CSS fonts  
E
F
Checked bookmarks can be  
deleted from the Internet  
menu.  
WIM Access  
When the browser requires access to the WIM card, for  
example, when establishing a secure connection, you have to  
enter the correct PIN. For more information, please contact your  
service provider or IT department.  
F
Select the bookmark text to  
open the page.  
G
G
H
Select to go to the home page.  
H
Signing documents  
You have to enter the signing PIN each time a signing operation  
is going to be performed.  
Shift between browser and  
bookmarks views.  
Internet  
80  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Bookmark view options  
Icons  
Bookmark  
Internet menu  
Open page – Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down  
list.  
Saved page  
Push message from the WAP service provider  
Signed document  
New bookmark – Enter the URL, the name of the bookmark  
and select the folder to save it in.  
Delete – Delete the selected bookmark.  
To open a bookmark  
Edit menu  
1. Select the bookmark text.  
2. The bookmarked item is opened.  
Edit – Edit the selected bookmark.  
Sort by date / name – Sort the entries. (Available for Push  
messages and Signed documents only.)  
To view bookmark information  
Zoom – Select zoom level: Small, Medium or Large.  
Preferences – Set the preferences of the browser.  
Help – Open the help for Internet.  
1. Select the check box of the preferred bookmark.  
2. Select Edit > Edit  
.
Information on the bookmark is shown. From the  
information screen you can:  
Folders menu  
All – Show all bookmarks in the list.  
– Edit the bookmark.  
Bookmarks – Show the bookmarks in the Bookmarks  
folder.  
– Delete the bookmark.  
– Send the bookmark as an email, SMS message, Bluetooth  
wireless technology, infrared, or MMS message.  
Saved pages – Show all saved pages.  
Unfiled – Show the bookmarks that are not in a folder.  
Edit folders – Categorize your bookmarks in folders  
(business, personal and so on).  
To delete several bookmarks  
1. Select the check box of the bookmarks to delete.  
2. Select Internet > Delete.  
The contents in the Folders menu can change depending on the  
pages and bookmarks stored in the P910a.  
3. Select Yes to confirm.  
81  
Internet  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Basic settings  
Preferences  
– Enter the URL for the page to be shown when the browser  
The browser is initially set up to work, but you have to set up  
is started from the Internet button; either a page stored in  
the P910a or a page on the Internet.  
your own account. A simple way of setting up an Internet  
account is to use the Web phone setup-message generator on  
www.SonyEricsson.com. See also ‘Internet accounts’ on  
page 155 for more information.  
– Select the WAP account to be used when the home page is  
loaded. The accounts are set up in the control panel.  
– Select if a new page should be displayed over the whole  
The easiest way to set up Internet and WAP accounts is to ask  
screen.  
your Internet service provider to send you an auto setup message  
– Select if you want to use a vertical scroll bar to scroll the  
containing the required setup information. The accounts will  
pages up and down. Otherwise you can use the Jog Dial.  
then be set up automatically on your P910a. To guarantee the  
– Select if images should be loaded. If images are not  
integrity of the settings, a PIN may be used.  
loaded, the page will be loaded faster. Non-loaded images  
For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for  
example on-line banking, can only be accessed from a particular  
WAP account. See ‘WAP accounts’ on page 165 for more  
information.  
can be loaded manually when viewing the page.  
– Select if sounds should be played when the page is  
opened.  
– Select if animations should be played when the page is  
opened.  
Note Proxy settings for MMS messages, and for a WAP gateway  
should be set in the WAP accounts. Other proxy settings should  
be set in the Internet accounts.  
Security settings  
– Select if you want to save signed documents.  
To set up the browser  
– Select if you want to connect without giving away your  
identity.  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
– Select if you want to connect using the WIM card.  
– Select if you want to allow cookies.  
2. Perform the setup according to the following:  
Internet  
82  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Advanced settings  
– Select if you want to be able to receive messages from  
your WAP service provider.  
– Select if you want to automatically open the URL in WAP  
Push messages.  
– Select if you want to remove out-of-date messages  
automatically.  
– Select a sound that notifies you when a Push message  
arrives.  
– Set the size of the cache memory. The cache is the part of  
the memory where viewed pages are stored. Stored pages  
will load faster when you visit them again.  
– Select Clear history to empty the list of pages visited and  
cookies stored.  
– Select Clear cache to empty the cache memory.  
83  
Internet  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Games  
There are two pre-installed games in your P910a. Traditional  
Played – Select if you want to play locally against your  
Chess and the card game Solitaire.  
P910a or against another P910a user.  
More games are available on the Content and Application CD in  
your original P910a box. You can also install games from other  
developers, see ‘Installing applications’ on page 131.  
3. Tap Play to start the game.  
To play Chess  
1. Select the piece you want to move.  
The square where it is standing will now be marked with a  
triangle.  
Chess  
You can play Chess against the P910a, or against another P910a  
user via SMS.  
2. Select the square to which you want to move the piece and  
the piece will move to it.  
Please read the help texts for detailed information on how to set  
up and play Chess.  
Closing the flip closes the game temporarily and saves the  
session status. Your opponent will be sent an end-of-game text  
message.  
To start a new game  
1. Select Chess > New game to initiate a game.  
2. Enter details as desired in the New game dialog. You can  
return to these details later.  
Name – Give the game a name so you can return to it later  
if you have to interrupt it.  
Notes – Write a note about the game.  
You play – Choose to play white or black.  
Against – Select the level of your opponent.  
Games  
84  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Aces are low and may not be played onto kings. Jokers can  
be played onto any card and any card can be played onto a  
joker.  
Solitaire  
Solitaire is a card game played with a standard deck of 52 cards  
and up to 4 Jokers.  
The purpose of Solitaire is to remove all the cards from the piles  
to the layout card while scoring as many points as possible.  
Play Solitaire  
Solitaire is only available with the flip open.  
Points are awarded for playing pile cards and bonus points are  
awarded for unbroken, ascending or descending runs of four or  
more rank cards.  
1. Select the icon for Solitaire.  
The game will either start with a new game or with the layout  
for an earlier, interrupted game. (the game data is saved on  
return to desktop, when the flip is closed or when the battery  
is low).  
When you cannot play any more cards and cards still remain in  
the piles, the game is over. If all the pile cards are removed,  
bonus points are awarded and the hand is won. You are then  
challenged to play a Higher/Lower game to acquire more bonus  
points. After the challenge, the game continues and a new hand  
is dealt with one less Joker.  
2. Select the card you want to move and it will be highlighted.  
3. Select the card to which you would like to move the  
highlighted card.  
To restart the game during a game  
Select Solitaire > New game.  
Rules  
When the game starts, 35 cards are dealt from the deck into  
7 piles of 5 cards. A further card is then dealt face up from the  
layout card.  
To undo/redo a move  
Select Edit > Undo move / Redo move.  
Cards can only be played from the bottom of the piles.  
To play a pile card it must have a face value of one more or  
one less than the layout card.  
85  
Games  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
BUSINESS  
Messages  
With  
types of messages:  
Messages you can create, send, and receive different  
– Files for exchanging electronic business cards (vCard)  
and calendar information (vCal).  
Auto setup files for OTA (Over The Air) configuration.  
SMS (Short Message Service) messages are text  
messages sent and received via the network operator's  
message center. When a text message has pictures,  
sounds, melodies and animations inserted, it becomes  
an EMS (Enhanced Message Service).  
Beamed messages. These are files received via infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
The different types of messages are handled by separate  
messaging accounts. Select  
Messaging accounts to see the details of the messaging accounts  
Control panel > Connections >  
MMS (Multimedia Message Service) messages.  
A multimedia message can contain text, graphics,  
animations, photographic images, audio clips and ring  
melodies.  
on your P910a.  
You can have any number of email accounts - a typical  
configuration will be one business and one personal account.  
When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for  
synchronized email is automatically created on your P910a.  
Email messages. Your P910a mail client supports POP3  
and IMAP4 mail servers, MIME attachments and  
SMTP for sending mail.  
You also use Messages to receive:  
With the flip closed, text and multimedia messages can be sent  
and received using the Jog Dial and the keypad. More advanced  
tasks are, however, best handled with the flip open.  
Area Information messages.These are text messages  
broadcast to all subscribers in a network area, for example  
local road reports or local taxi phone numbers. (Area  
Information services are not available from all operators).  
Before using Messages  
Before you can send and receive any messages (except for SMS)  
you need to set up the necessary accounts.  
BIO (Bearer Independent Object) messages. There are  
different types of messages:  
– Setup (email, Internet, WAP accounts).  
– Email notifications.  
Messages  
86  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
A simple way of setting up an Internet, email, or MMS account  
is to ask your service provider to send you a message that  
contains the required information to create an account  
automatically on your P910a. You can also use the Web phone  
setup-message generator on www.SonyEricsson.com. Received  
auto-setup messages are stored in the Auto setup inbox.  
To save an email message to Outbox  
1. After composing your message, select Send.  
2. Select Save to outbox.  
Messages that you send from an email synchronization account  
are always saved to Outbox and sent from your PC after your  
next synchronization.  
See ‘Getting started with Internet and Messages’ on page 172.  
Draft  
Folders in Messages  
Draft contains messages that are not ready to be sent.  
Messaging accounts can have the following folders: Inbox  
,
To store a new message in Draft  
Outbox Draft, Sent, and folders you can create yourself, local  
,
Create the message and exit without selecting Send  
.
folders. You can also subscribe to folders based on a server  
(remote folders), if you have selected IMAP for your email  
account.  
To move a message from Outbox to Draft  
Open the Outbox message list, select the message, and select  
Message > Move to draft  
.
Inbox  
Inbox contains received messages. You can reply to, forward,  
and delete messages, but not edit them.  
Sent  
Sent contains messages you have sent from your P910a.  
Tip Regularly delete old messages from your Sent folder,  
especially those with attachments, to clear storage space.  
Outbox  
Outbox contains messages that are ready to be sent. If you are  
creating several messages, and not using GPRS, you can reduce  
connection time by saving them to Outbox and then connect and  
send them all at the same time.  
87  
Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
command to download messages from the folders you have  
subscribed to.  
Local folders  
To create a new folder  
1. From the folder menu, select Edit folders  
2. Tap Add  
3. Name the folder.  
4. Tap Done  
.
The accounts in Messages  
.
When you open Messages, a list of your accounts appears.  
The top items in the list, Create SMS, and Create MMS, are  
.
shortcuts for directly creating new messages.  
Remote folders  
An asterisk next to an account indicates that a message has  
arrived since you last opened the accounts inbox.  
If you have selected connection type IMAP for your email  
account, you can subscribe to remote folders on your email  
server. (To select connection type, see “Email account basic tab  
settings” on page 161.) By default you subscribe to an Inbox  
folder.  
Handling text messages  
A text message is sent via SMS (Short Message Service). It can  
contain up to 160 characters (70 characters if you use non-Latin  
characters). If you create a longer message it will be sent as two  
(or more) separate messages (concatenated), but will usually be  
received as one message. If you add pictures, sounds and other  
items to your message it becomes an EMS message.  
Note If you change connection type, your Inbox will be emptied.  
Use the Get&send command to download your messages again.  
See “Get and send” on page 97.  
To subscribe to a new remote folder  
1. From the folder menu, select Subscribe  
2. Select the check box for the folders you wish to subscribe to.  
3. Tap Done  
.
Text messages can be sent to one or more people (not more than  
thirty, we recommend), and you can request a delivery report  
when your text messages have been delivered to the recipients.  
The delivery report arrives on your P910a as a text message.  
.
The new folders are shown in the folder list. Your subscribed  
folders will be shown in a flat structure, that is, subfolders will  
be shown on the same level as main folders. Use the Get&send  
Messages  
88  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If you leave the message before sending, it will automatically be  
stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which was  
already located in Outbox).  
Tap  
to insert a sound. The sounds last used appear.  
– Tap More to get more sounds to use.  
a
Tap  
Tap  
to write bold text.  
a
Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using  
Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:  
enter a comma between each address.  
to change the size of the text you write.  
To format the text in the message using EMS features  
1. Highlight the text you want to format.  
2. Tap Edit > Format text.  
To write and send a text message  
1. In  
Messages select Create SMS. (You can also select SMS >  
tap Message > New.)  
3. Tap General tab to change the Alignment and Font  
.
2. Enter the recipient’s number or select To and select recipient  
4. Tap Style tab to check the character style check boxes: bold,  
or recipients from your contact list and select Done.  
italic, underline, or strike through.  
3. Write your message.  
5. Select Done  
.
4. Go to the address tab  
delivery report or not.  
and specify whether you want a  
a
You can also use the icons  
and  
described above.  
a
To save a received EMS item  
5. Tap Send.  
1. Tap the item.  
To add an EMS item to your text message  
Use the icons at the bottom of the screen to select the type of  
item you wish to add.  
2. Select Edit > Save object  
.
Tap  
Tap  
to insert one of the smilies that appear.  
Handling multimedia messages  
to insert a picture or an animation. The pictures and  
MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) messages can include  
pictures, animations and sound, organized like a slide  
presentation with time-based control of the playback.  
Composing a multimedia message is like building a small slide  
animations last used appear.  
– Tap More to get more pictures and animations to use.  
– Tap New to draw a picture of your own.  
89  
Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
presentation. A typical page will consist of a picture, some text  
and sound. Refer to Technical data, section ‘MMS’ on page 200  
for supported file types that you can add.  
The first time a multimedia message is opened it plays  
automatically. The next time you open the message you can  
play it by pressing the Play Button (flip open) or by choosing  
Play from the menu (flip closed).  
You can take a picture with the CommuniCorder and send it as a  
multimedia message using the Send as command from Pictures.  
Multimedia messages can be sent to a mobile phone or an email  
account.  
To forward an MMS  
1. Open the message.  
2. From the Message menu, select Forward  
3. On the address tab, select To and enter the recipient’s  
mobile number or email address.  
4. Select Send  
.
How a recipient receives an MMS you send depends on your  
MMS service and how the receiving phone complies to MMS  
specifications. Phones can, for example, only receive pictures of  
a maximum size, video and sound.  
.
Your P910a can help you to create messages which conform to  
standard and therefore are more likely to reach recipients. Set  
the Content alert to warn or restrict you. See “MMS Advanced  
settings tabs” on page 164.  
To store a received MMS item, for example a picture  
1. Open the message.  
2. Select the picture you want to save.  
3. Select Save picture or select Edit > Save picture  
.
Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using  
Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:  
enter a comma between each address.  
4. Select the storage location.  
5. Select Save  
.
You can store items both internally and externally. You can also  
copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick.  
See ‘Folders’ on page 28.  
Incoming multimedia messages  
To play a received multimedia message  
Open the MMS inbox and select the new message.  
Creating and sending multimedia messages  
You can create multimedia messages in the P910a but you can  
also use the MMS editor on the Content and Application CD.  
Messages  
90  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To create a new multimedia message  
1. In  
Message > New. or open an existing message and select  
6. Select Edit > Background color to give the message a  
background color.  
Messages select Create MMS. (You can also select MMS >  
7. Tap  
to add a new page to the multimedia message in  
Message > New ).  
which you can insert items.  
2. From the Select template dialog, tap the name of the template  
you want and tap Select. The Blank template will open a blank  
message.  
8. Select Edit > Page order to change the page order in the  
message.  
To enter the recipient’s phone number  
3. The first page of the new  
message is now displayed.  
1. Select the  
address tab.  
M
e
s
sag  
e
Edit  
Draft  
Select an item from the  
menu that appears.  
2. Select To and select the recipient from Contacts.  
or:  
2
1/1  
Tap  
if it does not open  
automatically If you  
to open the menu  
Select the line beside To and enter the recipient’s mobile  
number or email address.  
CommuniCorder  
Add video  
.
To insert an attachment  
select Add scribble the  
Image editor presents a  
white background onto  
which manual graphics  
can be added. The Image  
Editor includes controls  
for pen, crop, color, scale,  
rotate and pen width.  
Add picture  
Add scribble  
Add text  
1. While creating your multimedia message, select the  
attachment tab, select Add  
.
Add sound  
2. Select the type of attachment you want to add.  
3. Select the attachment.  
Add recording  
Paste  
To send the multimedia message  
Send  
Tap Send  
.
4. Tap  
again to add text,  
audio or voice to the page.  
Tap the page to return to it.  
Preferences to a multimedia message  
Select Edit > Preferences to set the preferences to a multimedia  
message. The following settings are available:  
5. Tap  
if you want to change the time this page should be  
shown. Default time is 5 seconds.  
91  
Messages  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Hide number – Prevent your phone number from being  
displayed in the recipient’s phone. (Subscription dependent).  
To edit item time  
For each item in a page, it is possible to set the time when the  
item appears and for how long it is displayed or played.  
Read report – Request a receipt when the recipient has opened  
your message.  
1. Select the item so it is highlighted  
Delivery report – Request a receipt when the message has been  
delivered to the recipient’s phone.  
2. Select Edit time  
3. Set the Start, which is the number of seconds before the item  
appears after the start of the page. The default is 0, meaning  
show or play immediately.  
Editing multimedia messages  
Here you can see the first  
page with an inserted  
picture.  
4. The default Duration is for the item to continue for the  
remaining duration of the page. To change this, un-check  
Page time and change the duration to the required value in  
seconds. Start time + duration cannot exceed total page time.  
If you have added video or sound and the page time is longer  
than the video or sound play time, the video or sound will  
only play once (it will not be repeated in leftover page time).  
M
e
s
sag  
e
Edit  
Draft  
5
1/1  
10kb  
To delete, replace or edit an  
inserted item  
Select the inserted item and  
choose an action.  
You can also tap  
settings for all items in a page. Tap the time bar to adjust the  
time settings for each item.  
, or select Edit > Page time to see the time  
While editing an image you  
can add scribble, resize, crop  
or rotate your image or add  
text. To undo your changes,  
select Edit > Undo all.  
Edit picture  
Edit time  
Delete  
Copy  
To add or delete a template  
To make a template from a message, select Save as template,  
give the template a name, and tap Done  
Note If you have accepted  
changes by selecting Done,  
you will not be able to undo  
them.  
.
Send  
To delete a template, tap the name of the template you want  
in the Select template dialog and tap Delete  
.
Messages  
92  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To set the download method for receiving multimedia  
messages, manual or automatic  
To enter addresses from Contacts when writing an email  
1. Select To:  
In  
Control panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >  
2. In the Select contact dialog select the check box for each entry  
MMS > Automatic.  
you want to send the email to.  
Off means that only headers will be downloaded and can  
be viewed.  
3. Select Done.  
Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using  
Contacts) in a text message, multimedia message or in an email:  
enter a comma between each address.  
Home only means the same as for On below, but is only  
valid in your home country.  
On means that the multimedia message is downloaded and  
can be read like any other message. There is no  
intermediate step.  
Sending email  
To send an email message  
Select Send > Send immediately  
.
Handling email  
If your P910a is connected to the Internet when you send an  
email, it will be sent immediately and your P910a will remain  
connected to the Internet. If not, your P910a will connect to the  
Internet and then send the email.  
Writing email  
To write a new email  
Tip If you are creating several messages, and not using GPRS,  
you can reduce connection time by saving them to Outbox and  
then connect and send them all at the same time.  
Select an email account and select Message > New  
.
If you leave the message before sending, it will automatically be  
stored in the Draft folder (unless you edit a message which was  
already located in Outbox).  
To save an email message and send it later  
Select Send > Save to outbox  
.
To mark an email as urgent  
On the  
address tab, select High in the Priority list.  
93  
Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To move an email message from Outbox to Draft  
Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and Jotter. You can use this service if  
In your list of Outbox messages, tap to the left of the email (a tick  
Send as is available in the application’s main menu.  
appears), and select Message > Move to draft  
.
To attach a Calendar entry to an email message  
1. Open the entry in Calendar and select Calendar > Send As.  
2. Select Email > Done.  
If you leave the message before sending, it will automatically be  
stored in the Draft folder (unless it was created from Outbox).  
Setting email preferences  
Select Edit > Preferences to open the preferences dialogue.  
3. Complete the email message and select Send  
.
To attach a Contact to an email message  
Email account – The email account you are currently using.  
1. Open the contact details for the contact you wish to send and  
Always attach your card – The entry in Contacts specified as  
My card will be attached to your email messages.  
select Contacts > Send as.  
2. Select Email > Done.  
Always reply with history – The contents of the email you  
replay to is included in your new email.  
3. Complete the email message and select Send.  
Signature – The signature you write here ends your email  
messages.  
Receiving email  
Email must be fetched from the email server on the Internet or at  
your office. This can be done manually using the Get & send  
function or automatically by requesting the P910a to check for  
new email at certain times.  
Adding attachments  
To attach an entry to an email message  
1. On the  
attachment tab, select Add.  
When you forward an email, you can choose whether or not to  
forward the attachment. Large attachments increase the size of  
an email and consequently the connection time needed to send  
it.  
2. Select the type of attachment you want to add, and select the  
item.  
‘Send as’ email  
You can send an open entry as an attachment to a new email  
from multimedia applications, document editors, Internet,  
Messages  
94  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Receiving attachments  
To specify a size limit for email, above which you only receive  
a header  
Any attachments to an email message are displayed on the  
tab. The icon next to an attachment in the list identifies the  
type of attachment.  
1. Select  
Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >  
Email (select the email account) > Edit.  
To view an attachment you need a viewer for that type of  
file.Your P910a comes with pre-installed viewers for Microsoft  
Word, Excel, and Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files.  
2. Select Inbox.  
3. Select an option from the Download list.  
In your list of messages, headers are denoted by  
.
To save an attachment, for example a picture  
To download the full message  
1. Open the email message and select the  
tab.  
1. In your list of messages, select the header.  
2. The dialog Download, Yes/No appears.  
2. Tap the attachment, which opens the Pictures application.  
3. Select Pictures > Save  
.
3. Select Yes  
.
4. Select the location where you want to store the message.  
5. Select Save  
.
To download a series of messages  
1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of  
each entry (a tick appears).  
You can store items both internally and externally. You can also  
copy them between the internal memory and the Memory Stick.  
See ‘Folders’ on page 28.  
2. Select Get & Send  
.
Downloading  
Deleting messages  
You can choose not to download large messages and receive just  
a header instead. A header contains the subject line, sender’s  
details, and date, but not the full message.  
You can delete messages both locally and in your email server.  
To delete a message locally  
1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of the  
message header.  
2. Select Message > Local delete.  
95  
Messages  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
3. Select Yes  
.
P910a is not connected before sending an email, it will connect  
and send the message, and then disconnect.  
The message body and attachments are deleted but the heading  
remains. You can download the message again later.  
Note You can send text messages while connected to the  
Internet. If your connection is CSD or HSCSD it must be  
disconnected before you can make or receive a phone call.  
If your connection is GPRS, it may be suspended to enable a  
phone call to be made or received. You may need to repeat the  
data activity (Web page fetch, get email) after the call has  
ended.  
To delete a message both locally and in your email server  
1. In your list of messages, select the check box to the left of the  
message header.  
2. Select Message > Delete message.  
3. Select Yes  
.
If your P910a cannot connect to the email account, automatic  
The message is deleted in your P910a and in your email server  
and will no longer be visible in your message list.  
download will fail, and  
account.  
will be displayed next to the email  
Downloading email automatically  
You can schedule your email messages to be downloaded  
automatically at certain times.  
A scheduled download will fail if your P910a is engaged in a  
voice call. It may fail if it is connected to another ISP, that is,  
through a different Internet account than specified for the email  
account.  
To download your email automatically  
If email messages are not downloaded because a scheduled  
download fails, they will be downloaded during the next  
successful connection.  
1. In Control Panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >  
Email.  
2. Select the required email account and select Edit.  
3. Select Inbox > Schedule.  
4. Set time or interval for scheduled download and select Done  
.
Disconnecting and connecting  
If your P910a is already connected to the Internet when you  
send an email, it will remain connected after sending it. If your  
Messages  
96  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note If the email account is set up to access the mail server  
through a Secure access connection (see ‘Secure tokens’ on  
More about messaging  
page 169) you must have the flip open when you use Get&send  
.
If the flip is closed you will see an error message.  
Finding messages  
In both the list of accounts and list of messages, Find searches  
through the subject lines, senders’ details, the text of the  
message, and dates.  
Mark read and unread  
Use commands on the Edit menu to mark your received  
messages read or unread. You can also make P910a show just  
unread messages. If you have selected connection type IMAP for  
your email account, the read or unread status will be updated for  
the messages on the server the next time you use the Get&send  
command.  
In an open message, Find searches through the text of the  
message and highlights the text it finds.  
You can only search through email messages that have been  
fully downloaded.  
If you have changed the read or unread status for the messages  
on the server, for example from your PC, the read and unread  
status will change accordingly on your P910a.  
Get and send  
To get and send messages for one specific account  
To select connection type, see “Email account basic tab  
settings” on page 161.  
1. Select  
Messages.  
2. Select the desired account (MMS or email for example).  
Note If you change connection type, your Inbox will be emptied.  
Use the Get&send command to download your messages again.  
3. Select Get&send.  
To get and send messages for all your accounts  
1. Select  
Messages.  
Full screen view  
2. Select Message > Get&send. Any unsent messages in your  
Outbox will now be sent and new messages not yet  
downloaded will be downloaded to your P910a.  
Use the command Edit > Full screen to view your email messages  
and MMS in full screen. You can also edit email in full screen.  
Set your P910a to open email messages in full screen view by  
default, see “Email account Inbox tab settings” on page 161,  
97  
Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
and to play received MMS in full screen by default, see “MMS  
3. The dialog Do you want to disconnect from Internet?, Yes/No  
Advanced settings tabs” on page 164.  
appears.  
4. Select Yes  
.
Saving contact details  
If your service provider or network is  
unavailable  
When you receive a message, you can save the contact details of  
the person who sent you the message.  
Sometimes a message cannot be sent because your P910a cannot  
connect to a network. Please check that the Messaging Account  
and Internet Account information in the Control Panel is correct.  
To save the sender’s details  
On the message’s  
Note If you save an address from an email message  
synchronized from your company PC, the corporate version of  
the address, rather than the full Internet email address, will be  
saved to Contacts. If the corporate version of the address is not  
an Internet address (an X.400 address, or just the sender's  
name, for example), you can use it to send email from your  
synchronized account, but you cannot use it in email that you  
send directly from your P910a.  
If you have both GPRS and Dial-Up Internet accounts, try  
sending the email message using an account of the other type.  
GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network and Dial-Up  
Internet accounts use the GSM network.  
Synchronized email  
When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for  
synchronized email messages is automatically created on your  
P910a and indicated by  
. You can have more than one  
Connecting and disconnecting from the  
Internet  
account for synchronized email, but only one per PC. If you  
send an email as PC mail, the mail will be sent via the PC when  
you have synchronized your P910a with the PC.  
To disconnect from the Internet  
If you set up a POP or IMAP account which accesses the same  
mail server, the two accounts will contain the same messages.  
Note that there is no connection between the accounts; the  
copies in each account are separate.  
1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD  
in the status bar.  
or GPRS  
)
2. Select Disconnect from the pop-up menu  
Messages  
98  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Area information  
Area information messages are text messages that are sent to all  
subscribers in a certain network area, for example, a local traffic  
report. When you receive an area information message, the  
message automatically appears on the screen. When you dismiss  
the information, it will be stored in the Area info Inbox until it is  
replaced by a new message received on the same channel.  
Please consult your service provider for more information about  
the availability of area information services and area  
information channel numbering. See ‘‘Area tab’ on page 164 for  
more information.  
99  
Messages  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Contacts  
Contacts is like an address book, in which you can store names,  
phone numbers, email addresses and other useful information,  
including photos.  
Menus  
In both list view and detail view, you can use  
some of the P910a’s contact functions. The options will vary  
depending on the situation.  
to access  
The information stored in the SIM is also accessible. SIM  
entries can be copied to Contacts and Contacts entries can be  
copied to the SIM. Some SIM cards have Information numbers  
and Service numbers stored on the SIM card by the operator.  
These numbers are useful for service and information, and are  
accessible from the SIM within Contacts.  
Menu options in list view  
SIM – Display the contacts of the SIM card.  
Send my card – Send your owner card (See ‘Making an owner  
card’ on page 106) via infrared or Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
You can synchronize the contents in Contacts with one of the  
PIM applications in your PC supported by the P910a. See  
‘Synchronization and backup’ on page 139.  
Find – Search for a specific contact.  
Undo delete – Restore the last deleted contact. Will appear  
only if there is something to undo.  
# Applications – Access the application list view.  
Using Contacts with the flip  
closed  
Menu options in detail view  
Menu options in detail view: (availability depends on the type of  
contact detail, for example mobile number, that is highlighted.)  
With the flip closed, you can make calls and send text or  
multimedia messages.  
Send SMS – Send a multimedia message to the active contact  
Send MMS – Send a text message to the active contact.  
Call – Call the active contact.  
Contacts has two views when the flip is closed:  
An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the  
starting point for finding a contact.  
List view  
The details for a contact.  
Detail view  
Contacts  
100  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Send as – Send the active contact using infrared or Bluetooth  
wireless technology.  
3. Select a contact and press the Jog Dial or press  
the detail view for a contact.  
to open  
Delete contact – Delete the active contact.  
To return to the list view, press  
.
# Applications – Will access the application list view.  
Note To make a call to a contact in the SIM, select SIM from the  
options menu. If there are service numbers or information  
numbers stored on the SIM card, you can also access them.  
Menu options in SIM  
View all – Switch to Contacts list.  
To make a call  
Service numbers – Display the service numbers on the SIM  
card. This option is only displayed if there are service  
numbers stored on the SIM card.  
1. Select a phone number.  
2. Press the Jog Dial or press  
.
Information numbers – As for service numbers above.  
Find – Search for a specific contact.  
or  
1. Select a phone number.  
# Applications – Will access the application list view.  
2. Select Call from the options menu.  
To send a text message  
Selecting a contact with the flip closed  
1. Select a phone number.  
To select a contact  
2. Select Send SMS from the options menu.  
1. Select  
.
To send a multimedia message  
1. Select a phone number.  
2. Then either:  
– Scroll down to the desired contact.  
2. Select Send MMS from the options menu.  
– Press a number key. The first contact corresponding to the  
first letter of the key appears. To search further, continue  
to enter the letters with the keys.  
– Select Find from the menu and search for the contact.  
101  
Contacts  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To add a contact  
The details for a contact.  
Detail view  
Edit view  
Contact details, displayed in a way that allows you  
to add and change the information.  
You can create a new contact using information from a recently  
received voice call or message. See also ‘Add to contacts’ on  
page 53.  
Tabs at the bottom of the list view provide a fast way to locate  
information. To highlight the first entry that begins with the first  
letter on a tab, select the tab once. To highlight the first entry  
that begins with the next letter on the tab, select the tab again,  
and again for the third letter on the tab.  
1. Select Yes when asked to add to contacts.  
2. Enter contact name and edit the number, if required.  
To delete a contact  
abc def ghi jkl mno pqr stu v-z  
1. Select the contact.  
2. Select Delete contact from the options menu.  
Making a call with the flip open  
To restore a deleted contact, select Undo delete from the  
To open Contacts  
options menu.  
Tap  
or select Contacts in the Application launcher  
.
To make a call  
Using Contacts with the flip  
open  
1. If required, change folder from the Folders menu.  
2. Scroll down to the desired contact.  
Open the flip and tap  
launcher  
or select Contacts in the Application  
If the contact list is long, first select a tab at the bottom of the  
view.  
to open Contacts.  
Contacts has three views when the flip is open:  
3. Select the contact to display the contact details.  
4. Depending on what you want to do, make one of the  
following choices:  
An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the  
starting point for finding a contact.  
List view  
– Select  
– Select  
or  
or the phone number to make a call.  
or the email address to send an email.  
Contacts  
102  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
– Select  
– Select  
– Select  
or the URL to open a Web page.  
to send a multimedia message.  
to send a text message.  
Note Save mobile numbers as mobile numbers. Otherwise they  
will not be available when addressing text messages.  
To add a field to a contact  
1. Select the contact.  
Using service and information numbers  
2. Select Edit > Edit contact.  
3. Select Edit > Add field.  
To call an Information number or Service number on the SIM  
card  
4. Select the field to be added from the drop-down list.  
5. Select Add.  
1. Select SIM in the folders menu.  
2. Select Contacts > Information numbers / Service numbers and  
select a phone number or select a sub-category and then a  
phone number.  
To add a DTMF tone sequence  
1. Select a field and set it to Phone (h)  
.
Add a new field if necessary.  
3. Select Call  
.
2. Enter a  
p
and then the tone digits. Enter a to insert a pause.  
p
It is necessary to start the tone sequence with a p so the  
phone recognizes it as a tone sequence.  
Creating and editing contacts  
You can sort the contacts according to first name, last name or  
company. The contact entries can also be filtered by folder, such  
To send a DTMF tone sequence during a call  
1. During a call, open the contact’s detail view.  
as Business or Personal  
.
2. Tap  
at the tone sequence.  
To create a new contact  
Read more about DTMF tones in ‘Controlling tone-based  
services’ on page 49.  
1. Select Contacts > New  
.
2. Enter the desired information. When applicable, select from  
the drop-down menus.  
To add a voice dialing command  
Contacts with a voice dialing command are shown in Voice  
commands in the folders menu.  
103  
Contacts  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
1. Select  
at the bottom of the screen.  
To personalize the ring melody for a contact  
Contacts with a personalized ring melody are shown in Personal  
ring type in the folders menu.  
2. Select a number.  
3. Tap the Record button and record a voice command after the  
tone.  
1. Against Ring Tone, select Find sound from the drop-down  
menu.  
4. Tap Play to check the quality of the recording.  
2. If required, change folder.  
3. Select the required sound.  
To remove a voice command, select the Del button.  
To add a note to a contact  
1. Select  
4. Tap  
and  
to preview the sound.  
.
5. Tap Select to set this sound for the contact.  
2. Enter the text.  
Note The selected ring melody will only be played if the  
network provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity) to enable the  
contact to be identified, otherwise the Default Melody will be  
played.  
3. If you do not want the note to be included when you send,  
beam, or synchronize the contact, select the Private check  
box.  
Note If the ring melody selected for this contact is later deleted  
To add a photo or other picture to a contact  
or moved, the Default Melody will be played.  
1. Select the photo view tab  
2. Tap the picture space.  
3. If required, change folder.  
4. Select the picture to use.  
5. Tap the Select button.  
.
To change the details of a contact  
1. Select a contact.  
2. Select Edit > Edit contact, or tap the tab.  
3. Change the desired information. When applicable, select  
from the drop-down menus.  
To change a picture, select the picture and select Replace  
image.  
To delete a contact  
To remove a picture, select the picture and select Delete image.  
1. Select the contact.  
Contacts  
104  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select Contacts > Delete contact.  
4. Follow the instructions, for example, select a folder or a  
sending method.  
To create or edit a contact on the SIM card  
5. Tap Done or Yes to confirm the action.  
1. Select SIM from the Folders menu.  
To search for an entry containing specific text  
1. Select Contacts > Find.  
2. Create or edit the contact as described above.  
All options are, however, not available for the SIM card  
contacts.  
2. Enter the text string you wish to search for.  
3. Select either In all fields or In Names & Company and tap Find.  
4. When the search is complete, all results will be displayed.  
Managing contacts  
You can use Contacts manager to move contacts between the  
folders, send contacts as a Vcard to another device, or to delete  
them. You can also send or delete contacts on the SIM card with  
Note Searching is not case sensitive and you do not have to  
enter an entire word to locate a matching entry.  
the Contacts manager  
.
Copying contacts to and from the SIM card  
You can also copy information between the contacts list and the  
SIM card.  
See ‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 30 for information  
about how to receive contacts from another device.  
To move, send or delete a contact  
To copy contacts from the SIM card  
1. Select Contacts > Contacts manager  
.
1. Select SIM in the folders menu to the right in the menu bar.  
2. Select the contacts you want to manage.  
2. Select Edit > Copy all to Contacts for copying all SIM entries  
or  
(If required, change folder from the Folders menu. Selecting  
All will show all the contacts from all the folders except the  
SIM. Clicking the Select all check box will select all the  
contacts in the current folder.)  
Tap a SIM entry to open it and select Edit > Copy to Contacts to  
copy the selected SIM entry.  
3. Select Send / Move / Delete  
.
To copy contacts to the SIM card  
1. Select a contact.  
105  
Contacts  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select Edit > Copy to SIM card  
.
Preferences  
3. If the contact has multiple phone numbers, each number will  
be created as a separate entry in the SIM phonebook.  
Contacts tab  
4. Select Done  
.
To sort the contact list and show the preferred phone number  
1. Select Edit > Preferences  
.
Making an owner card  
2. Select the desired sorting option (first name, last name or  
You can create an electronic business card, containing your  
contact details, including notes and a photo. You can then send  
this card to another device.  
company) and tap Done.  
3. If you want a phone number to be shown next to the name in  
list view, select Show preferred phone number  
.
If no preferred number has been set up for the contact, the  
first phone number will be used.  
To create your owner card  
1. Select Contacts > New and enter your details.  
4. Select Done.  
2. Select Contacts > Set as my card  
.
Tip You can also create an owner card by viewing the detail  
view of a contact and selecting the menu option Set as my card  
To change the preferred phone number  
.
1. Select a contact.  
2. Select Edit > Edit contact  
.
To send your owner card  
3. Select Edit > Show in list.  
4. Select the number to be shown from the list.  
5. Tap Done.  
1. Open the list view, and then select Contacts > Send my card  
.
2. Send the card using Send as  
.
Read more about sending items in ‘Sending and receiving items’  
on page 30.  
Note If no number appears, ensure that Show preferred phone  
number is checked in preferences.  
To view or edit your owner card  
Select Contacts > View my card.  
Contacts  
106  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Calendar  
The Calendar function helps you to keep track of appointments  
and events, and you can also set reminder alarms for the entries.  
Creating calendar entries  
A reminder is denoted by a  
.
To create a new calendar entry  
1. Select Calendar > New and enter a short description of the  
Different views  
entry. This is the description you see in the calendar.  
You can see your Calendar entries in three views with the flip  
open: Day, Week and Month. With the flip closed you will see  
the Day view.  
2. Tap Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a  
folder to store the entry in.  
3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail  
page.  
To change view in flip open  
Type - Specify if the entry is an appointment, reminder or  
all day event.  
Tap  
Tap  
Tap  
Tap  
to display the Day view.  
to display the Week view.  
Date - Select the date to get a calendar where you can set a  
date for the entry.  
to display the Month view.  
to navigate to the present day in the displayed view.  
Time - Set start and end time for the entry.  
If you tap an entry in week view, the subject and time for that  
entry are shown.  
Location - Specify a location or select a location you have  
used before.  
Alarm - Select the check box if you want your P910a to  
alert you about the entry with a sound. Select the time and  
date that appears for your settings.  
To navigate backwards or forwards in the current view  
Tap the left and right arrows in the button bar at the bottom of  
the screen. You can also rotate the Jog Dial.  
Repeat - Specify if you want to repeat the entry or not.  
Read more about this below.  
To navigate to a specific date in the current view  
Tap the day, week or month heading at the top of the display to  
show a calendar pop-up in which you can select a specific date.  
Calendar  
107  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Private - Select the check box to prevent the item from  
being viewed by others than yourself if you synchronize  
your calendar with, for example, your PC.  
Managing calendar entries  
To find a certain entry  
4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry.  
5. Select to save and close the entry.  
1. Select Calendar > Find  
.
2. Enter a search word in the menu that appears.  
3. Select where to search (Everywhere, Future, Past).  
4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed.  
5. Select an entry on the result list to open it.  
You should delete old entries regularly to release memory.  
To create re-occurring entries  
1. When the entry is open, select Repeat  
.
– Set repeating to Daily Monthly by date, Monthly by  
,
Weekly  
,
To delete an entry  
day  
,
Yearly by date or Yearly by day.  
Open the entry and select Calendar > Delete entry  
.
Interval - Specify how often the event will happen, for  
example, by selecting Weekly and Interval 2 means that the  
event will go off every two weeks on the specified day.  
A deleted entry may be restored with Edit > Undo delete  
.
To delete all entries in a period of time  
Forever/Until - Set the time limit for the alarm or select  
forever.  
1. Select Calendar > Remove entries  
.
2. Select the time period and select Done. All entries from that  
2. Select days - Weekly repeated events can be set to occur twice  
or more in a week. For example, eating lunch with a friend  
Tuesday and Friday every week.  
time period are deleted from the Calendar.  
Note Repeated entries will not be deleted.  
Note You cannot repeat All Day Events  
To copy, cut or paste an entry  
1. Open the entry.  
To edit an entry  
2. Select Edit > Copy entry/ Cut entry.  
3. Go to the day where you want to place the entry.  
4. Select Paste entry.  
1. Open the entry by tapping it in the calendar.  
2. Make the changes in accordance with the instructions above.  
108  
Calendar  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To move a Calendar item to Tasks  
2. Select the General tab, and fill in the required details.  
1. Open the entry and select Calendar > Move to Tasks  
.
To customize the alarm settings  
1. Select Edit > Preferences.  
2. Select the Alarm tab.  
2. The entry is moved, not copied.  
If you move an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also sound in  
Tasks.  
Now, you can change the Alarm precedes event by setting - the  
To cut or copy Calendar entries to the Tasks application  
1. Open the entry and select Edit > Cut entry or Copy entry.  
2. Open Tasks.  
length of time before an entry that the alarm goes off.  
To assign colors to your entries using the folders  
1. In Calendar, select the folders menu to the right in the menu  
3. Select Edit > Paste entry.  
bar and select Edit folders.  
2. Select a folder and select Edit or create a new folder by  
selecting Add  
.
Sending and receiving calendar  
entries  
3. Select the color box and select color for that folder and select  
Done  
.
You can send and receive calendar entries using Send as. See  
Entries in a folder with a specific color appear in that color in  
Day and Week views (but not in Month view) so that you can  
see the pattern of events in your diary. Reminders appear as  
whatever the folder color.  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 30.  
Preferences  
You can customize the calendar views and alarm settings to suit  
your own needs.  
Saving changes  
If you leave Calendar while editing an entry, your changes will  
be saved automatically.  
To customize the calendar view, General tab  
1. Select Edit > Preferences.  
Calendar  
109  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tasks  
With the Tasks function you can make a list of things you need  
to do. The folders help you to separate different types of  
activities.  
Completed – Select the check box when the task is  
done.This can also be done directly in the Tasks list.  
Priority – Set a priority for the task. You can sort the tasks  
by priority.  
You can move entries between Tasks and the Calendar, which is  
useful when you come to schedule a Tasks entry. You can also  
send an entry via text message, infrared, Bluetooth wireless  
technology, multimedia message or email.  
Due date – Select the check box to set a deadline for the  
task. Select the date that appears to get a calendar where  
you can set a due date.  
Alarm – Select the check box if you want your P910a to  
alert you about the task. Select the time and date that  
appears for your settings.  
Creating task entries  
Private – Select the check box to prevent the task from  
being visible by others, when synchronized with shared  
calendars or tasks in other devices, for example your PC.  
The Tasks list shows a short description of the task. Select a task  
to see its full information.  
A task entry consists of two pages. One detail page where you  
set the properties for the task, and one page where you can add  
notes.  
4. Select the note page tab to write a note for this entry.  
5. Select to save and close the task.  
Note Delete will delete the whole task entry.  
To create a new task entry  
1. Select Tasks > New and enter a short description of the task.  
To edit an entry  
This is the description you see in the task list.  
1. Open the entry by tapping it in the Tasks list.  
2. Make the changes according to the instructions above.  
2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a  
folder to store the task in.  
3. Continue to enter information for the items on the detail  
page.  
Tasks  
110  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To restore a deleted entry  
Managing task entries  
Select Edit > Undo delete.  
To open an existing entry  
Select the entry in the Tasks list.  
To delete all completed entries  
In your Tasks list, select Tasks > Delete completed  
.
To mark an entry as completed  
Note When you delete All Completed Entries, they are deleted  
Select the check box to the left of the entry in the Tasks list.  
permanently and cannot be restored.  
To sort the entries  
Select Edit > Sort on priority or Sort on date  
.
Moving task entries  
To find a certain entry  
To move an entry to the Calendar  
1. Select Tasks > Find  
.
Open the entry and select Tasks > Move to Calendar. The entry is  
moved, not copied.  
2. Enter a search word.  
3. Select in which folder to search or use the default value  
To copy a task entry to Calendar  
All folders  
.
1. Open the entry and select Edit > Copy entry  
.
4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed.  
2. Open Calendar.  
5. Select an entry on the result list to open it.  
3. Enter the day you wish the task to appear.  
4. Select Edit > Paste entry in Calendar.  
To make a copy of an entry or paste an entry  
1. Open a task and select Edit > Copy entry.  
2. In list view, select Edit > Paste entry.  
Note If you move or copy an entry to the Calendar, it will lose  
the priority it was assigned in Tasks.  
If you do not set a due date for the task entry, the current date  
will be used for the new Calendar entry. If you move or copy an  
entry with an alarm, the alarm will also be moved to the  
Calendar.  
To delete an entry  
Open the entry in the task list and then select Delete  
.
111  
Tasks  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Sending and receiving task  
entries  
You can send and receive task entries using Send as. See  
‘Sending and receiving items’ on page 30.  
Preferences  
Select Edit > Preferences to change the settings. The following  
settings are available.  
Display due dates – Select whether or not to display them in  
the Tasks list.  
Display completed – Select whether or not to display them  
in the Tasks list. This will not delete the completed tasks.  
Tasks  
112  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Jotter  
The Jotter works as a notebook where you can write notes and  
draw pictures. The folders help you to separate different types of  
notes.  
To edit a note while working with it  
For text, select Edit > Revert.  
The text returns to its original state. All changes are lost.  
A Jotter entry consists of two pages. One text page and one  
drawing page. With the flip closed, you can read and edit your  
notes, but you cannot view or edit pictures.  
For sketches, select Edit > Undo.  
This choice removes your last pen stroke. If you change your  
mind, select Edit > Redo  
.
When opening Jotter you will see a list of entered notes, with the  
first words of each text note. Select a note to see its full  
information or edit it.  
To create a new note from text or sketches copied from another  
application  
Open the list of notes and select Edit > Paste  
.
Note If you paste a sketch over an existing sketch, the existing  
sketch will be deleted.  
Creating and editing notes  
Create a note with the flip closed (text only)  
To create a new note  
1. Select Applications >Jotter with the flip closed.  
1. Open Jotter and select Jotter >New.  
The new note will automatically start as a text note. Select  
2. If you have previous notes stored, these will now be listed.  
Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it.  
to get bold text and  
to create a bullet list.  
A
3. Press  
if you want to create a new note. Select New.  
2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a  
Insert your text by using the keypad.  
folder to store the jotter in.  
3. Select the drawing page tab to draw a sketch for this note.  
4. Select  
to save and close the note.  
Jotter  
113  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Edit a note with the flip closed  
Managing notes  
1. Select Applications >Jotter with the flip closed.  
2. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it.  
3. Press . Select Edit. Insert your text using the keypad.  
To delete a note  
1. Select the note in the notes list.  
The note opens.  
2. Select Jotter > Delete note  
.
Drawing pictures  
You can draw with different  
nib widths and colors. The  
Sending and receiving notes  
main window is the ‘paper’  
where you can draw with  
your stylus in the same way  
as you draw with an ordinary  
pen.  
Jotter Edit  
Unfiled  
You can send and receive notes using Send as. See ‘Sending and  
receiving items’ on page 30.  
Note Selecting Send as SMS will send the text only.  
Select  
to change color.  
to change the  
Select  
virtual nib.  
Select  
to activate the  
eraser. Tap the eraser again to  
re-activate the pen.  
All jotter files (both text and  
drawings) are automatically  
stored in the P910a. The list  
view will be presented to you as soon as you start the Jotter  
application.  
114  
Jotter  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
TOOLS  
Sound recorder  
In Sound recorder you can record and listen to your own sound  
recordings. You can also send your recordings to other devices  
via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication,  
email or multimedia message, and use a sound recording as a  
ring signal.  
3. Select  
to finish the recording.  
Key functions  
Select... To...  
start recording a sound.  
Each memo is identified by the date and time it was recorded  
and by its position in the list of sound recordings.  
listen to the current sound recording.  
stop the current sound recording.  
go to the previous sound recording in the list.  
go to the next sound recording in the list.  
Making sound recordings  
To record and save a sound recording  
1. Select  
>
> New.  
To delete a sound recording  
1. Select a sound recording you want to delete.  
A new sound recording is created.  
2. Select and start recording after the beep.  
3. Select to finish the recording.  
2. Select Delete recording > Yes  
.
The new sound recording is automatically saved in the list of  
sound recordings with the current date and time.  
To append to the end of a previous sound recording  
1. Select the required recording.  
2. Select  
and start recording after the beep.  
Sound recorder  
115  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Using sound recordings as ring  
signals  
You can set a sound recording as a ring signal.Your sound  
recordings will appear in the list of sounds that can be selected  
as ring signals. They will take the form voicenote and a number,  
for example voicenote1470  
.
To set a sound recording as a ring signal see ‘Sounds and alerts’  
on page 149.  
Sending sound recordings  
You can send Sound recorder recordings via Bluetooth wireless  
technology, infrared communication, email or as a multimedia  
message.  
To send a sound recording  
1. Select Sound recorder > Send as  
.
2. Select how you want to send the sound recording. See To  
send an item using Send as’ on page 30 for more  
information.  
Note All other sound media on your P910a is handled via the  
Music player application. You can send sound items from  
Music player and all received sound items are played using Music  
player  
.
116  
Sound recorder  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Calculator  
The Calculator is a standard 12-digit calculator. You can add,  
subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and  
Key functions  
mr  
m+  
m-  
Tap once to retrieve a value from the memory and enter it  
into the screen.  
Tap twice to clear the memory.  
percentages. It also has a memory function.  
To use the calculator  
Tap once to store an entered value in the memory.  
If you have already entered a value in the memory, tap once  
to add the value on the screen to the value in the memory.  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Enter the calculations by tapping the digits.  
Tap once to subtract the entered value from the value in the  
memory. The memory is adjusted but not displayed.  
All calculations, except percentage calculations, are performed  
in the order they are entered, for example: 5+5x5=50, not 30.  
Tap once to delete the last digit you entered.  
Tap once to reset the screen to 0.  
Percentage calculations are performed backwards. To calculate,  
for example, 10% of 50, enter 50x10%. The result is displayed  
when you tap the %-key.  
C
You can copy and paste values to and from other applications by  
selecting Calculator > Copy or Paste  
.
Values stored in the memory are retained while using other  
applications.  
Calculator  
117  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Time  
The time and date are always displayed on the flip closed  
standby screen. You can customize the display of times and  
dates throughout your P910a. You can set your current location  
and another location of your choice. It is also possible to set  
three different alarms.  
Use the am/pm box to switch between am and pm. (This is  
only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.) Confirm  
by tapping outside the time picker.  
6. Set Update time. This is useful when you travel between time  
zones.  
Prompt – The phone asks you if you want to update the  
clock according to the new time zone.  
Setting time and date  
Auto – The phone automatically updates the clock  
according to the new time zone.  
To set the current time and date  
Off – The clock will not be updated.  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the  
7. Select Done.  
current time and date settings.  
3. Tap the Date box, then use the arrows to set the current year  
and month. Then select the current day.  
Format  
You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed  
on the screen, and if you want to use the 12- or 24-hour time  
format.  
4. Tap Summertime, then select the check box next to the zone  
that currently has summer time and tap Done. This is only  
required if you are currently in a country/region with summer  
time.  
To set the time and date display format  
5. Tap the time box, then tap the upper half of the hour or  
minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower  
half to decrease the number.  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the  
current time and date settings.  
3. Select Format  
.
Time  
118  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
4. Tap the Date Format box and choose a format.  
Setting locations  
5. Tap the Date Separator box and choose a separator.  
Specify the country/region and city you are currently in. The  
6. Select a Time format  
.
city you select will be displayed next to the clock in Time.  
7. Tap the Time separator box and choose a separator.  
8. Select Done  
If you are away from home, for example traveling in another  
country/region, it can be useful to know what the time is in your  
home country/region as well as the country/region you are in.  
The city you select as Other City will be displayed below the  
clock in Time.  
.
Specifying workdays  
You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want  
to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also  
specify the first day of your week to customize the display of  
both Week and Month views in Calendar.  
To set the locations  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Tap Time > Set location  
.
3. Tap the Current Country/Region box and select the country/  
region you are in at that moment.  
To specify your workdays  
1. Select  
>
.
4. Tap the Current City box and select the city you are in at that  
moment. If the city you are in is not listed, select the city  
closest to you.  
2. Tap the clock, or select Time > Set time & date, to view the  
current time and date settings.  
3. Select Workdays  
.
5. Tap the Other Country/Region box and choose a country/  
region.  
4. Select the check boxes next to the days you normally work.  
5. Select First day of week and choose a day.  
6. Tap the Other City box and choose a city.  
6. Tap Done  
.
7. Tap Done.  
119  
Time  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
allowed, you can set the P910a to flight mode, see ‘Flight mode’  
on page 48.  
Setting number formats  
You can choose how you want the measurements and numbers  
Note If you have connected a stereo headset to the P910a, the  
alarm will only be heard in the headset.  
in your P910a to be displayed in all your applications. Distances  
can be displayed using the imperial or the metric system and  
different punctuation marks can be used as separators.  
To activate an existing alarm  
To set the number details  
Select the check box in the alarm slot.  
the status bar on the screen.  
is displayed on  
1. Select  
>
.
2. Select Time > Set location  
.
To set a new alarm  
1. Select  
2. Select one of the alarm slots.  
3. Select Numbers  
.
>
.
4. Choose separators and symbol positions from the drop-down  
lists. You can tap the keyboard icon to find currency  
symbols.  
3. Select Time and choose at what time you want the alarm to go  
off. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker.  
5. Tap Done  
.
4. Select When and choose how often you want the alarm to go  
off:  
Once The alarm will go off once only, at a time more than  
24 hours from now but within the next eight days.  
Setting alarms  
You can set up to three different alarms in your P910a. You can  
choose to activate one of the preset alarms, or set a new alarm  
with your own definitions.  
Next 24 hours Within the next 24 hours.  
Daily Every day at the specified time.  
Workdays Every workday at the specified time.  
Weekly Every week at the specified time.  
You can choose to set a silent alarm, where only a message is  
displayed when it goes off, or you can set a sound alert.  
5. Select Alarm sound and choose a sound.  
Alarms requires that the P910a is turned on. If you want to get  
alarms in an environment where radio transmitters are not  
6. Select Message and choose a preset message or write a new  
one.  
Time  
120  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
7. Tap Done  
.
8. Make sure the check box next to the alarm is selected.  
When the alarm goes off, select Snooze to postpone the alarm for  
five minutes or Silence to turn off the alarm sound. To turn off  
the alarm completely, tap Done  
.
121  
Time  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice  
Your phone contains the following viewers and editors:  
Common viewer and editor  
functions  
Quickword– view and edit Microsoft Word documents  
Quicksheet– view and edit Microsoft Excel documents  
Quickpoint– view Microsoft Power Point presentations  
Pdf+ – view AdobeAcrobat(PDF) documents  
To open a document from an email or Internet page  
Select the document link. The document viewer opens the  
document in the detail view.  
When the flip is open there are two views:  
To open a document from the list view  
An alphabetical list of files, for selecting a file to  
view.  
List view  
1. Select the Application launcher icon  
2. Select, for example, the Quickword icon  
3. If required, change folder.  
.
The contents of a file, for viewing and editing the  
file.  
Detail view  
.
The applications are also started automatically when selecting  
and opening attachments to messages.  
4. Scroll to the desired file and select the file name.  
5. The document is shown in the detail view.  
To save documents to another location (internal or on the  
Memory Stick) you use folders, see ‘Folders’ on page 28.  
The functions available differ depending on the document type.  
Common functions are similar between the applications and are  
described first.  
Please read the help texts for detailed information about the  
viewers and editors.  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice  
122  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Quickword  
Quicksheet  
To save and copy the document to a specific folder  
To save and copy the document to a specific folder  
1. In the list view, select Quickword > Copy  
.
1. In the list view, select Quicksheet > Copy  
.
2. Select where to save the document, and select Copy  
.
2. Select where to save the document, and select Copy  
.
To edit a document  
To edit a document  
In the detail view, from the toolbar at the bottom of the screen,  
The first time you edit a document (in native Microsoft Excel  
format) transferred to your P910a, you have to rename it. When  
you select OK, your P910a copies the document with the new  
name.  
select the edit icon  
.
The first time you edit a document (in native Microsoft Word  
format) transferred to your P910a, you have to rename it. When  
you select OK, your P910a copies the document with the new  
name.  
At the bottom of the screen you find the spreadsheet character  
input field, and icons for performing the most common  
spreadsheet functions.  
In the toolbar you find icons for performing the most common  
word-processing functions.  
When you have edited the document and leave it, your P910a  
saves it automatically.  
When you have finished editing and leave the document, your  
P910a saves it automatically.  
123  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Show previous slide.  
Quickpoint  
Store large presentations on the Memory Stick to leave the  
phone memory available for running applications. Animations  
and embedded objects will be shown as plain text.  
Expand the current slide (in Outline view).  
Collapse the current slide (in Outline view).  
Zoom in (in Slide view).  
To handle a presentation file  
Zoom out (in Slide view).  
1. Highlight the presentation file in List view  
.
2. Select the required command from the Quickpoint menu.  
Viewing a presentation  
The presentation opens by default in Outline view where the  
outline of the whole presentation appears. You can shift to Notes  
view where you can see the notes to each slide, or to Slide view  
to show the slides.  
Navigate through the presentation with the stylus and the Jog  
Dial. Change the type of viewing from the toolbar at the bottom  
of the screen. The commands are also available from the menus:  
Outline view. Show the slide headings and the sub texts.  
Notes view. Show notes added to a slide.  
Slide view. Show the presentation.  
Switch between fullscreen view and normal view.  
Show next slide.  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice  
124  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Wrap the document, that is the text is displayed in a format  
which fits the screen. Images and line drawings are not visible  
in this view.  
Pdf+  
To save and copy a received document  
Unwrap the document.  
1. In the detail view, from the toolbar at the bottom of the  
Search.  
screen, select the save icon  
.
2. Name the document, select where to save it, and select Save  
.
Search for links.  
To move a document  
In the detail view, from the folder menu, select a new folder.  
To view a document  
Change the type of viewing from the toolbar at the bottom of the  
screen:  
Bookmarks view. Select a heading to go to the corresponding  
page. You can also use the Jog Dial to select a bookmark, and  
then use the icon below to go to the corresponding page.  
Go to the selected page.  
Return to the page view.  
Go to previous page.  
Go to next page.  
Full screen.  
To return to the normal view, select the icon and de-select  
Full screen.  
125  
Viewers and editors – Quickoffice  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
File manager  
With the File manager you can view, rename, copy, move, and  
delete files and folders on the P910a. You can also add folders,  
send files and rename and format the Memory Stick.  
also format the Memory Stick, see ‘Formatting a Memory Stick’  
on page 23.  
To move within the folder structure  
Initially, the root view is shown, with the sub folders:  
To move up in the hierarchy - tap the top folder.  
Audio, where all audio files are stored.  
To view the contents of a folder or a file - tap the top folder.  
Folders are opened in the file manager while other files are  
opened in the applicable application.  
Document, where different document files are stored.  
Image, where all images, pictures as well as drawings, are  
stored.  
To add a folder  
Other, where all files not applicable for the other folders are  
stored.  
1. Select File > New folder  
.
2. Type a folder name and tap Done  
.
Video, where all video clips are stored.  
Using the folder menu, you can select between the internal  
storage and the external storage, that is, the Memory Stick. The  
path to the selected folder is shown at the top of the window.  
To copy or move one or more folders or files  
1. Select the folders or files to handle.  
2. Select the required activity from the File menu.  
Note There is an important distinction between External media  
3. Select the destination and tap Done  
.
and External other External other lets you view folders that have  
.
been placed on the Memory Stick by other equipment, such as  
digital cameras. This is the only place where these folders can  
be viewed.  
From the file manager it is possible to reach the Control Panel  
storage manager, see ‘Storage manager’ on page 169. You can  
File manager  
126  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To delete one or more folders or files  
Note Only empty folders can be deleted.  
1. Select the folders or files to delete.  
2. Select File > Delete  
.
3. Tap Delete  
.
To change properties for one or more folders or files  
1. Select the folders or files to change.  
2. Select File > Properties  
.
3. Change the properties, as required.  
4. Tap Done  
.
127  
File manager  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Online services  
Online services is a customized service offered by a network  
i
operator. This function is network- or subscription-dependent.  
Online services provides a mechanism that allows applications  
that exist on the SIM to interact and operate with the P910a. It  
may provide services ranging from weather forecasts to the  
latest information from the stock market.  
Online service are placed on your SIM card by your operator.  
Note Contact your operator to find out which services are  
available for your account.  
Note If this service is available on your SIM, the Online  
services application will appear in the application list under a  
name defined by the SIM provider. However, the icon used to  
represent the Online services application  
will not change.  
i
Online services  
128  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS  
PC Suite and Content and Application CDs  
Installation of the Sony Ericsson PC Suite  
The Sony Ericsson PC Suite programs can be used with  
Windows ME, 98, 2000 and XP.  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite  
The Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD delivered with your P910a  
contains a set of useful applications:  
When inserting the CD in the PC, a start menu is automatically  
shown. Select language and then start the Sony Ericsson PC Suite  
Setup. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard.  
Synchronization – Synchronization of Calendar, Notes,  
Contacts and Tasks against Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes  
and Lotus Organizer.  
Backup and Restore – Make safety copies of your data via  
SyncStation.  
If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run  
command in the Windows Start menu to start Start.exe from your  
CD drive.  
File Manager – Transfer files (images, documents, music) via  
Windows® Explorer between your P910a and PC.  
By default the Sony Ericsson PC Suite is accessed from  
Install software – Install applications in the P910a.  
Start menu > Programs > Sony Ericsson > P910a.  
Download Language – Change the language in the P910a.  
Additional languages are downloaded from  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
The Setup application also can be used later to add or delete  
components.  
You can download the latest PC Suite software from  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
Dial-Up Networking Wizard – Wizard for GPRS and HSCSD  
settings for using your P910a as a modem.  
Drivers – Drivers for modem and the USB cable connected  
SyncStation.  
Refer to the online help for each specific application.  
PC Suite and Content and Application CDs  
129  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Content and Application CD  
The Content and Application CD contains a number of applications  
and files to be installed in, or downloaded to, your P910a and  
used together with its applications.  
Games  
Audio files  
Pictures  
Video clips  
MMS templates  
MMS editor  
Image editor  
Opening the Content and Application CD for  
P910a  
When you insert the CD in the PC, a start menu opens  
automatically. Select an item from the menu and follow the  
instructions on the PC screen.  
If the start menu is not automatically shown, use the Run  
command in the Windows Start menu to start CDBrowser.exe from  
your CD drive.  
130  
PC Suite and Content and Application CDs  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Installing applications  
It is possible to install new applications in your P910a. These  
applications can be obtained in several ways, for example:  
Applications which are not approved by Sony Ericsson are not  
guaranteed to work correctly or securely, and users install them  
at their own risk. Product failures caused by applications not  
approved or made for Sony Ericsson will not be covered by your  
warranty.  
from the Internet.  
from a CD.  
from a Memory Stick.  
as an email attachment.  
from other devices.  
Installing applications on your  
P910a  
There are two types of installation files for applications:  
SIS (Symbian Standard Installation) made for P910a or other  
Sony Ericsson devices.  
Installation file security  
Installation files in SIS format are typically used for installation  
of Epoc or PersonalJava™ applications or other content into the  
P910a file system.The vendor who prepared the SIS file decides  
where in the file system the various content of the SIS file will  
be installed. This means that you need to decide if you trust that  
the SIS file does not contain harmful content. If you are certain  
of the origin of the SIS file you can take an installation decision  
based on what you know about that vendor. Your P910a  
MIDP JAR (Mobile Information Device Profile Java  
Archive).  
Note SIS and JAR files are installation packages containing one  
or more files.  
Programs made for the Sony Ericsson P800 and P900 series can  
also be used in the P910a.  
This chapter also applies to other types of software to install, for  
example, system components and add-ons.  
supports cryptographic verification of vendor identity.  
During installation the P910a verifies a digital signature and  
certificate in the SIS file against a root certificate in the phone.  
Successful verification means that you can trust the origin of the  
Applications from developers outside Sony Ericsson, so-called  
third-party developers, might be possible to install in the P910a.  
Installing applications  
131  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SIS file and that the content has not been modified after it was  
created. If the SIS file does not contain a digital signature you  
will be given a warning about the problem but you can still  
decide to proceed with the installation at your own risk. In  
general, it is recommended that you install only from SIS files  
where the vendor identity and file integrity can be verified.  
4. Select target drive (phone memory or Memory Stick).  
Download to the P910a begins.  
5. Installation starts when the download is complete.  
From the P910a  
Program packages, for example, games, can also be downloaded  
to your P910a from the Internet or from a Memory Stick. When  
downloading a file from the Internet, the installation will start  
automatically when the file is completely downloaded to your  
P910a. The procedure below describes installation of  
application packages transferred to the P910a but not yet  
installed.  
Note Installation of uncertified applications may cause your  
system to crash and all your data will then be lost.  
MIDP applications run in a protected environment with no  
access to sensitive information so no signatures are required for  
MIDP JAR files.  
From a PC  
See ‘To download and upload files, for example, applications’  
on page 79 for information about how to download files from  
the Internet.  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite must be installed in your PC and the  
P910a must be connected to the PC via SyncStation, infrared, or  
Bluetooth wireless technology in order to install applications  
from your PC.  
Installing applications in the P910a  
1. Select  
.
Installing applications from your PC  
2. From the menu, select Applications > Install  
.
1. Connect your P910a to the PC via SyncStation, infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology. When connected, an icon is  
shown in the status area to the right in the taskbar on the PC.  
3. Select the software from the list.  
4. Select Install. If the software is certified, an information  
dialog will be shown with the name of the software, version  
and supplier. Select Install again.  
2. Start the PC software Install Software and select the  
application (.sis file) to install. You can also open a .sis file  
directly in your PC.  
3. Confirm to install the application in the P910a.  
132  
Installing applications  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
5. Now, depending on the software, you may be prompted to  
Sony Ericsson Update Service  
replace a previous installation, select language, memory  
With Sony Ericsson Update Service you can keep your phone  
location and select other installation options.  
updated with the latest P910a software. When a new software  
version is available, you can download and install it using the  
SyncStation and an Internet-connected PC (preferably via  
Removing applications from  
your P910a  
To update the P910a software  
It is sometimes necessary to remove installed applications and  
1. Connect the SyncStation to your PC and place your P910a  
user data to free up memory.  
into it.  
Removing applications in the P910a  
1. Select  
2. Visit Sony Ericsson P910a support site on  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
.
3. Select Sony Ericsson Update Service and follow the  
instructions on how to proceed with the update sequence.  
2. From the menu, select Applications > Uninstall  
.
3. Select the application to be uninstalled.  
Answer Yes when you are asked if you want to install the Sony  
Ericsson Update Service PC program.  
4. Select Uninstall  
5. Tap Yes to confirm.  
6. Select Done  
.
Note User data can be lost when the software is updated.  
Always back up the phone before updating.  
.
Tip See also ‘Master reset’ on page 168 and ‘Storage manager’  
on page 169 in Control Panel for more options regarding removal  
of applications and user data.  
Some removed applications can be reinstalled from the Sony  
Ericsson PC Suite CD or the Content and Application CD.  
Installing applications  
133  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Connecting to other devices  
Your P910a can be connected to other devices with similar  
interfaces such as PCs, other P910as and handheld computers.  
PC connectivity software  
Your P910a is delivered with a CD, Sony Ericsson PC Suite.  
This software must be installed in the PC you want to connect  
to. See ‘Installing applications’ on page 131 for more  
information. You do not need to install the Sony Ericsson PC  
Suite if you only want to perform beaming with the PC or use a  
cordless headset.  
The connection can be made via:  
Bluetooth wireless technology (not together with  
Windows 98)  
Cable  
Infrared (IrDA)  
Note To save the battery, turn off Bluetooth wireless technology  
and infrared when you do not need them.  
Connection via SyncStation  
Note Install the Sony Ericsson PC Suite before you connect the  
SyncStation.  
Depending on the type of connection you have chosen, you can  
use your P910a to perform various tasks, for example:  
Connect the SyncStation to your PC with the USB cable. A  
wizard helps you to install the USB cable the first time. The  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD contains the necessary software.  
Sending and receiving files via infrared or Bluetooth wireless  
technology – ‘beaming’.  
Making Backup/Restore and Synchronization of your data  
and file transfer (cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless  
technology).  
Put your P910a in the SyncStation. A new wizard starts which  
helps you to connect your P910a if this is the first time.  
appears in the status area to the right on the taskbar when  
the P910a is connected.  
You can even use your P910a as a modem for Dial-Up  
Networking using cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless  
technology. With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can for  
example, connect a cordless headset.  
When connecting via cable, the P910a can be set in PC Connect  
mode or Modem mode. The setting is made in Control panel >  
Connections > Cable, see ‘Cable’ on page 154.  
Connecting to other devices  
134  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Set the P910a in PC connect mode for  
3. Set the port state to On or On for 10 minutes.  
You can also change the infrared port state with the flip closed,  
in the Connections application.  
Synchronization.  
Installation of software.  
Backup and restore.  
To activate the infrared port on the PC  
1. Right click  
in the status area to the right on the taskbar.  
Set the P910a in Modem mode when using  
2. Select Properties  
P910a as a modem.  
3. Select the Infrared check box  
4. Click Close  
Dial-up network wizard.  
.
You should disable the USB cable connection in these two  
cases. In your PC select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone  
Monitor Options > COM Ports and disable the COM port to  
which the cable is connected.  
Note Clear the Infrared check box when ready.  
Send and receive  
You can send items via the infrared port, beam, in any  
application if there is a Send as command. To send, select  
Infrared. If you receive a beamed item, a dialog box appears with  
Connection via Infrared port  
three options: Delete  
opens the associated application which shows the item; Done  
saves it in the Beamed folder in Messages  
,
View or Done. Delete deletes the item; View  
When connecting via the infrared port, make sure that both  
devices are placed within one meter from each other and that the  
infrared ports have a free line of sight between them.  
.
Both your P910a and the device you connect to must have their  
infrared ports activated before communication can begin.  
To activate the infrared port on the P910a  
1. Go to Control panel > Connections > Infrared  
.
2. Set the P910a to PC connect or Modem as required.  
135  
Connecting to other devices  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Activating Bluetooth wireless technology  
Activate Bluetooth wireless technology on your P910a in Control  
panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings. Set Bluetooth to On, and  
set if your P910a should be Visible by other devices or not. See  
‘Bluetooth’ on page 153 for more information on Bluetooth  
wireless technology settings.  
Connection via Bluetooth  
wireless technology  
You can connect your P910a to other products equipped with  
Bluetooth wireless technology, for example PCs, car handsfree  
devices, or other mobile phones, and exchange data. Since  
Bluetooth wireless technology is radio-based, there does not  
have to be a free line of sight between transmitting and receiving  
devices. This means that your P910a can stay in your pocket  
while communicating. However, items between transmitting and  
receiving devices might weaken the signal.  
The Bluetooth wireless technology operation mode can also be  
changed with the flip closed, through the Connections  
application. When the Bluetooth wireless technology is  
activated,  
appears on the screen and the left indicator light  
on top of your P910a flashes blue.  
Connection to another device can be made within a range of up  
to 10 meters. Obstructions between the transmitting devices will  
have an effect on the performance. For all tasks, except  
Pairing  
beaming, it is necessary that you first set up a permanent and  
trusted relationship between your P910a and the other device.  
This process is called pairing (other documentation may refer to  
it as bonding). The paired devices are remembered by your  
P910a even after you have turned it off so you do not need to  
repeat the process for every connection with those devices. The  
reason for pairing is to simplify future connections and to make  
them secure – only paired devices can connect to your P910a.  
To let your P910a initiate pairing with another device, such as  
a headset  
1. In Control panel > Connections> Bluetooth > Settings, set Bluetooth  
to On. Make sure Visible to other devices is selected.  
2. Set the other device to be on or discoverable.  
3. In the Devices tab, tap Add. Your P910a searches for all  
devices in the vicinity and lists them.  
– All enabled devices that are visible to others within range,  
are shown with their name and icon. You can use Show: to  
restrict the list to one category (only PC, for example).  
– Paired devices that are within range are shown with  
regular text.  
Connecting to other devices  
136  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
– Non-paired devices that are within range are shown with  
Tip You can change the name of a paired device. When you pair  
with other Bluetooth wireless technology enabled phones, it is  
very useful to include the user's name as part of the device  
name. This will make it very easy to beam information to the  
desired recipients.  
their names in italics.  
– Devices that are within range but unknown are shown  
with a preset name.  
4. Select the device you want your P910a to pair with, and enter  
a passcode when asked for it. When the passcode is accepted,  
the pairing process is complete, see ‘Passcodes’ on page 138.  
To let a headphone initiate pairing with your P910a  
1. Check that the device you want to pair with your P910a:  
– Is on and within range.  
5. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect  
to your P910a without you explicitly approving each  
connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >  
Bluetooth > Devices, then select a device and the check box  
– Has its Bluetooth function activated and that it is in  
visible mode.  
2. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set  
Allow to connect without confirmation  
.
Bluetooth to On  
.
To let another device initiate pairing with your P910a  
3. Follow the headphone’s manual to initiate pairing on the  
headphone.  
1. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set  
Bluetooth to On  
.
4. In the Devices tab tap Add. Your P910a searches for all  
devices in the vicinity and lists them.  
2. Follow the other device’s manual to initiate pairing.  
5. When asked for a passcode, enter the headphone’s passcode  
on your P910a.  
3. When asked for a passcode, enter the same on both devices.  
4. If in the future you want to allow a paired device to connect  
to your P910a without you explicitly approving each  
6. If in the future you want to allow the headphone to connect to  
your P910a without you explicitly approving each  
connection you should select Control panel > Connections >  
Bluetooth > Devices, select a device and the check box Allow to  
connection, you should select Control panel > Connections >  
Bluetooth > Devices, select the headphone and the check box  
connect without confirmation  
.
Allow to connect without confirmation  
.
137  
Connecting to other devices  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To remove a paired device from your P910a  
Bluetooth Shared. The item is then copied to the Shared folder,  
accessible by other users. When a user requests to access your  
Shared folder, a request dialog is shown, where you can Accept or  
Reject the transfer.  
Select a device in the list and select Remove  
.
Passcodes  
Passcodes ensure that the device you pair with really is the  
device you think it is. A passcode is a set of numbers and/or  
letters (at least four characters) that you agree to exchange with  
the owner of the other device. Simply agree a passcode with the  
other user and each enter the same code into both devices when  
asked for it. The actual code is up to you; the important thing is  
that you both enter the same code. Accessories like headsets  
often have a default passcode, usually ‘0000’, see the specific  
user guide.  
Send and receive  
You can send items via Bluetooth wireless technology in any  
application if there is a Send as command. To send, select  
Bluetooth. If you receive an item via Bluetooth wireless  
technology, a dialog box appears with three options: Delete  
Delete deletes the item; View opens the associated  
application which shows the item; Done saves it in the Beamed  
folder in Messages  
,
View  
or Done  
.
.
Bluetooth share  
You can make it possible for other users to transfer items from  
your P910a. To make an item accessible, select Send as >  
Connecting to other devices  
138  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Synchronization and backup  
With Sony Ericsson PC Suite installed in your PC, your P910a  
can synchronize with the following PC applications, also called  
Personal Information Managers (PIMs):  
Note If you have imported SIM phonebook entries into Contacts  
in your P910a, these entries will not be synchronized with the  
corresponding entries in your PC when synchronizing your  
P910a and PC. You will instead get duplicates in your P910a.  
Lotus® Organizer® 5 & 6, 6.5  
Lotus Notes® 5.0, 6  
Microsoft Outlook 98, 2000, 2002, 2003  
Microsoft Windows Address Book  
Local synchronization  
Bluetooth  
Synchronization is divided into local and remote. Local  
synchronization is performed directly to a connected PC while  
remote synchronization is done over the air with a remote server  
in, for example, a corporate network.  
Irda  
The manual describes the easiest way to perform the tasks but  
you can also carry out most of them by selecting Start > Programs  
> Sony Ericsson > P910a in the PC and then select the desired  
command.  
Cable  
Local synchronization is done with either cable, infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology. The functionality is the same.  
Refer to the online help find in Help in the menu bar in the PC  
software to get more information about synchronization and  
backup. You can also take a look on Global support area at  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
Email, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Jotter notes (only text)  
can be synchronized locally.  
Synchronization and backup  
139  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To make a manual synchronization  
Local synchronization settings  
1. Connect your P910a via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For more information, see ‘Connecting to other  
devices’ on page 134.  
Local synchronization is initiated from the PC and all settings  
are made in the P910a PC software (included on the Sony  
Ericsson PC Suite CD).  
2. In the PC, click on  
on the PC taskbar and select  
The easiest way to synchronize is to set the Synchronization to  
automatically make a synchronization every time your P910a is  
connected.  
Synchronize  
.
The synchronization starts.  
3. After a short time, the PC application you want to  
synchronize with might ask you to allow the P910a access to  
it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues.  
To make the synchronization settings  
In the PC, click on  
in the status area to the right in the  
taskbar on the PC and select Sync Station Settings  
.
A dialog appears where you can make the synchronization  
settings. Click Help in the dialog to get more information about  
the settings.  
Making a local synchronization  
To make an automatic synchronization  
1. Connect your P910a via SyncStation, infrared or Bluetooth  
wireless technology. For more information, see ‘Connecting  
to other devices’ on page 134.  
2. Synchronization starts automatically.  
3. After a short time, the PC application you want to  
synchronize with might ask you to allow the P910a access to  
it. Answer Yes and the synchronization continues.  
140  
Synchronization and backup  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Remote synchronization settings  
Remote synchronization  
Remote synchronization takes place over the air and is the ideal  
To configure the remote synchronization server  
way to keep the P910a up-to-date while on the move. Using  
GPRS, the P910a can be continuously connected to the remote  
synchronization server.  
In Applications, select  
Remote Sync > Edit > Preferences and fill  
in the following parameters:  
– Server address  
– Username  
– Password  
GPRS, HSCSD  
or CSD  
You might also need to fill in whether to use transport login  
under the Protocol tab. Contact your corporate information  
services help desk or your service provider for information on  
these parameters.  
PIM Application  
Sync Server  
Firewall  
You also need to have at least one configured Internet account  
that remote sync can use to connect, see ‘Internet accounts’ on  
page 155.  
Internet/Intranet  
To select items to synchronize  
1. In Remote Sync, select one item in the list you want to be  
synchronized.  
Synchronization services may be offered by mobile operators,  
third-party service providers and as added capability to  
corporate PIM applications.  
2. Select the Enable task check box.  
3. Fill in the Task name or leave default.  
4. Fill in the Server database (contact your corporate  
Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks can be synchronized remotely.  
information services help desk or your service provider).  
5. The item you selected to be synchronized is now above the  
divider in the list. (Disabled items are below the divider.)  
Synchronization and backup  
141  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
6. Repeat for other items.  
Note Backup and restore does not work via infrared or  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
Making a remote synchronization  
Performing a backup  
Open Applications > Remote Sync and tap the Sync button.  
To make a backup  
When ready, the Task status column shows today's date for all  
successfully synchronized items.  
1. Turn on your P910a and connect it to the PC via cable.  
2. In the PC, click on  
on the PC taskbar and select Back up  
and restore  
.
Backing up data  
3. Select your P910a in the menu that appears. Several P910as  
can be backed up to the same PC.  
You can use the P910a Backup and Restore PC software to back up  
the contents stored in your P910a to your computer. Keeping  
backups of your P910a contents on your computer means that  
you have a separate copy of the contents of the P910a, which  
can be restored into the P910a. Backups should be made on a  
regular basis. See the online help for P910a Backup and Restore for  
more information on how to use the application.  
4. Select Backup and choose what to back up: P910a and/or  
Memory Stick.  
5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the  
P910a.  
6. The backup is complete.  
Note All user data will be deleted when the P910a software is  
upgraded by a Service Partner. Always back up your data before  
handing over the P910a for upgrading, so that you can restore it  
afterwards  
Restoring data  
Lost data or accidentally deleted information in your P910a can  
be restored from an earlier backup. A backup from the phone  
can only be restored to the phone, and a backup from a Memory  
Stick can only be restored to a Memory Stick.  
Preconditions  
The Sony Ericsson PC Suite must be installed in the PC and the  
P910a must be connected to the PC via cable.  
To restore a backup  
1. Turn on your P910a and connect it to the PC via cable.  
142  
Synchronization and backup  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. In the PC, click on  
on the PC taskbar and select Back up  
and restore  
.
3. Select your P910a in the menu that appears. Several P910as  
can be backed up to the same PC.  
4. Select one of the backups in the list of previously saved  
backups and click Restore  
.
5. Click Yes and follow the instructions in the PC and in the  
P910a.  
6. The restore is complete.  
Note Everything in your P910a will be overwritten by the  
chosen backup. Once you have clicked Yes to start the restore,  
you cannot cancel the procedure.  
Note If you have used your Secure Tokens (Secure Access files)  
since you made your backup, you must reconfigure these. If you  
restore another P910a, you must reconfigure your Secure  
Tokens. For more information see ‘Secure tokens’ on page 169.  
Synchronization and backup  
143  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SETTINGS  
Personalizing your P910a  
There are a number of ways you can give your P910a a personal  
Setting a background picture  
touch and change its settings to suit your requirements.  
You can change the background image (wallpaper) for the  
standby screen in  
Control panel > Device > Display. You can use  
any image stored internally or on a Memory Stick.  
Themes  
Tip More background images can be found on the Multimedia  
P910a CD, delivered with your P910a.  
Themes control the color of screen and text, the icons, and the  
background picture, the wallpaper. Sound themes control the  
notification alerts. Some themes are pre-loaded in the P910a.  
Extra themes can be found on the Content and Application CD  
where you also can use the themes editor to modify the themes  
or create new ones.  
You can obtain suitable background picture files by  
downloading, MMS, beaming using Bluetooth or infrared, or  
transferring them using a cable from your PC.  
Background picture images are 208 x 144 pixels and the picture  
can be seen in the standby screen. (Any chosen picture will be  
scaled to fit the screen). The images can be JPEG, GIF, BMP,  
WBMP, MBM or PNG format.  
To change the theme, select  
see ‘Themes’ on page 151  
Control panel > Device > Themes,  
.
Changing your application  
shortcuts  
Setting the light intensity  
You can set the maximum and minimum display light intensity.  
This is useful to save the battery or protect your night sight  
when driving a car. See “Power tab” on page 148.  
You can change and rearrange the five shortcuts to applications,  
shown in the standby screen when the flip is closed, and the five  
first shortcuts in the Application picker area in flip open (not the  
Application launcher  
be hidden, if you wish.  
). The flip closed shortcuts can even  
Personalizing your P910a  
144  
                     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
If your network operator provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity)  
Setting a screen saver  
service, your P910a can display the contact’s picture together  
You can set a screen saver picture to be displayed after a period  
with the other information when an incoming call is received  
of inactivity. See ‘Display’ on page 147. Keylock and device  
with a CLI matching that contact (not all numbers can be  
lock may be used in combination with the screen saver. When  
displayed). The contact’s picture is also displayed when you  
you press a key or touch the screen, you will be prompted to  
make a call to that person.  
activate keys and/or enter the device lock code.  
To choose the contact’s picture size  
The images can be JPEG, GIF (including animated), BMP,  
WBMP, MBM or PNG format. Image format for the screen  
saver is 208 x 320 pixels.  
1. Select  
Phone > Edit >Preferences > Incoming call picture.  
2. Select the Show large pop-up picture for incoming calls check  
box.  
Note Using animated GIF uses more power.  
3. Tap Done  
Adding images to your  
Contacts  
Ring signals  
Your P910a can play both iMelody format and polyphonic ring  
signals in WAV, AU, AMR, MIDI, RMF, and MP3 sound file  
formats. When you choose a ring signal, your P910a will scan  
the internal and Memory Stick storage and present you with a  
list of ring signals that are in these formats. Recordings you  
have made using Sound Recorder can also be selected.  
You can store a picture with  
each entry in Contacts. See  
11:03  
‘Creating and editing  
contacts’ on page 103.  
J
+
ohn  
S
4613244500  
mith  
(h)  
Pictures are easily taken  
using the CommuniCorder  
(see ‘CommuniCorder’ on  
page 58) though of course  
other images can be used.  
Ring signals can be added by downloading from the Internet,  
beaming using infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology file  
transfer from a PC and by using a Memory Stick. Extra ring  
signals can be found on the Content and Application CD. You  
End call  
145  
Personalizing your P910a  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
can add as many ring signals as desired, subject only to  
Alarm tones and sound  
available storage space.  
notification  
Tip Sound Recorder recordings are listed as voicenote and a  
number, for example voicenote1470.  
You can choose different sounds for alarms and notifications in  
these applications:  
A ring signal may be selected for an entry in Contacts, so that  
the caller can be identified by the ring signal that is played. See  
‘To personalize the ring melody for a contact’ on page 104.  
Time  
See ‘Setting alarms’ on page 120.  
Calendar  
Set a sound for reminder alerts, see ‘Preferences’  
on page 109).  
Note The mobile network must provide the CLI (Calling Line  
Identity) of the caller to enable the contact to be identified.  
Tasks  
Set a sound for reminder alarms. See ‘Preferences’  
on page 112.  
You may change the default ring signal that is played in all other  
cases. To do this, see ‘Sounds and alerts’ on page 149.  
Messages  
Set a different sound for each type of message as  
notification of a new message:  
See ‘Sounds and alerts’ on page 149.  
Note If your P910a finds that you have renamed, moved or  
deleted a ring signal, it will play the default instead.  
Note If you use an audio file as alarm or notification signal, it  
will be played using the Multimedia volume setting. The ring  
volume setting will not effect the sound volume.  
Personalizing your P910a  
146  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Control panel  
The Control Panel is the location for all the main settings on  
your P910a that are system-wide and affect more than one  
application. This is the main place to go to initially set up your  
P910a, and to change settings at any point thereafter. To access  
and ‘Navigation’ on page 17. You can change the five shortcuts  
shown. If you feel that the flip closed shortcuts obscure your  
background, you can choose to have them hidden when you do  
not need them.  
it, select  
Applications >  
Control panel.  
To change an application shortcut  
Tip You can find settings that apply to a single application in  
the Preferences menu of the application, for example: Phone > Edit  
> Preferences, CommuniCorder > CommuniCorder > Preferences,  
Internet > Edit > Preferences.  
1. In the Application shortcuts dialog, select the Flip open or Flip  
closed tab depending on the shortcuts you intend to change.  
2. Select the icon you wish to change. The name of the  
application is shown in the Set application pick list.  
The sections below describe the settings available for each of  
the default items in the Control panel.  
3. Choose the application you want to replace it with from the  
list.  
To hide the flip closed application shortcuts when your P910a  
is inactive  
Clear the Shortcuts always displayed check box.  
The Device tab  
The device tab contains settings related to the behavior of your  
P910a device itself.  
Display  
Use the Display settings to control the screen and power  
functions of your P910a.  
Application shortcuts  
Use this dialog to configure the application shortcuts shown in  
the flip closed standby view, and the Application picker  
shortcuts in the flip open mode. See ‘Standby view’ on page 15  
Control panel  
147  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
screen ensures that the correct item is activated. Tap Calibrate  
screen and follow the instructions.  
Wallpaper tab  
You can set a picture to be the background, wallpaper, for the  
standby screen.  
Power tab  
1. Select if the flip closed or flip open wallpaper should be  
You can set if the power save should switch off the screen, blank  
changed.  
the screen or show a clock on the screen. You can also set the  
power save time between 1 and 30 minutes.  
2. Tap the image showing the current picture.  
3. Browse to see picture files available on your P910a.  
If you set times for both screen saver and power saver, the  
4. Select a picture and tap Select  
.
power saver time will commence after the screen saver is  
displayed.  
Read more about background in ‘Personalizing your P910a’ on  
page 144.  
You can set the screen light settings for handheld use and car  
use.  
Screen tab  
You can set a picture to be the screen saver.  
Auto  
Light switches on when you tap the screen, press a key, or  
receive an incoming call  
On  
Off  
Light is always on  
Light is always off  
1. Select a picture for the screen saver.  
2. Set the activation time for the screen saver.  
If you select the Screen saver device lock check box the device  
lock will activate when the delay runs out. Read more about the  
device lock in ‘Device lock’ on page 38.  
Select Adjust brightness to set to set the normal (max) and  
dimmed (min) light intensity for handheld use and car use. The  
Brightness box works as a slider.  
If you set a time for the Automatic Input Lock, the keyboard lock  
will activate when the time runs out. Read more about the  
automatic keylock in ‘Automatic keylock’ on page 39.  
Occasionally you may find that you tap one item (for example a  
button or menu option) but another is activated. Calibrating the  
148  
Control panel  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
On the Location tab  
Flight mode  
Set Current country/region and Current city, state to your current  
In flight mode the radio function is turned off. You cannot make  
and receive calls but most of the other functions in the P910a are  
available.  
location.  
Set Other country/region and Other city, state to an alternative  
location (for example your home location if you are abroad).  
Use these settings to turn the flight mode on or off and also to  
activate the Power menu. When activated, the Power menu will  
ask you if you want to start the P910a in normal mode or flight  
mode each time you turn on the P910a. Also, when you press the  
On/Off button when your P910a is on, the Power menu will ask  
you if you want to turn off the P910a, or switch to another mode.  
If the city you want is not listed, select another city in the  
desired time zone.  
On the Numbers tab  
Set the decimal separator and thousands separator you desire.  
To activate the Power menu  
Select the Prompt me... check box and tap Done  
.
Locks  
Locks contains options for activating the locks on the device,  
the SIM card and the keys on the keypad, and for changing the  
lock codes, see ‘P910a locks’ on page 37.  
To cancel the selection of Power menu  
Clear the Prompt me... check box and tap Done  
.
International  
Sounds and alerts  
Use these settings to set the locations shown in  
Time, as well  
Use these settings to control sounds and alerts of your P910a.  
as the units for distances, numerical separators, and how  
currency values should be shown.There are two tabs: Location  
and Numbers.  
Calls tab – Sets ring tones and volume.  
Messages tab – Sets notification alerts for messages.  
Other tab – Sets button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms,  
and other notifications.  
Control panel  
149  
             
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
You can choose to use any sound recording or audio file. You can  
Calls tab  
select ring signals that are stored on your phone or on a Memory  
These settings set incoming call alerts. For more information see  
Stick. If the selected file is later deleted or moved, the Default  
‘Ring signals’ on page 145.  
Melody will be played instead.  
You may personalize the ring melodies further for individual  
contacts, see ‘To change the details of a contact’ on page 104.  
To listen to the selected ringtone or alert  
1. Tap the icon to listen to the signal.  
Ring (voice) – Select a ring signal for incoming voice calls.  
2. Tap again to stop playback.  
Ring (voice) line 2 – Select a ring signal for incoming voice  
calls.  
To change the default ring tone or alert  
Ring (data) – Select a ring signal for incoming data calls.  
1. Tap the drop-down menu.  
2. Select Default Melody for the P910a default or Find sound to  
Ring volume – Set the preferred sound level for handheld,  
handsfree and car use.  
select a new one.  
3. If required, change folder.  
4. Select the required sound  
Increasing ring – Select the checkbox to use increasing ring  
signals. This disables the other volume settings.  
5. Tap  
and  
to preview the sound.  
Messages tab  
6. Tap Select to set this sound.  
These settings set messaging alerts.  
Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the  
higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure  
to excessive volume may damage hearing.  
Display notification message – Select the check box to receive  
notification of a received message.  
SMS – Select an alert for received SMS messages.  
Email – Select an alert for received Email messages.  
MMS – Select an alert for received MMS messages.  
To set vibrating alert, silent mode, speakerphone, or mute the  
microphone  
Tap the volume icon on the status bar.  
150  
Control panel  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Area info – Select an alert for received area information  
messages.  
Use the settings on the Primary  
set methods for entering text in your P910a.  
,
Alternative and Flip Closed tabs to  
Auto setup – Select an alert for auto setup messages.  
Primary  
The method that you select here is activated  
automatically when you need to enter text into your  
P910a.  
Other tab  
Alternative  
Flip closed  
The method that you select here is activated if you  
These settings set button and screen clicks, reminders, alarms,  
and other notifications.  
tap  
at the bottom of the screen.  
The method that you select here is activated when you  
need to enter text with the flip closed.  
Button click – Select the sound used when you press a key on  
the keypad.  
If you load other text input software, select it and adjust its  
settings here.  
Screen tap – Select the sound used when you tap the screen.  
Key press – Select the sound used when you press a key on  
the keyboard on the flips inside.  
Themes  
Reminder – Select an alert to be played for reminders.  
You can set the look of the user interface by changing the theme.  
Voice messages – Select an alert to be played for voice  
messages.  
To change the theme, select a theme from the list. The picture  
shows the flip closed standby background. Tap Select  
.
Default alarm – Select the default alarm sound.  
To listen to a theme sound, select the event from the drop-  
down list. Tap the icon to play. Tap again to stop playback.  
Text input  
To send a theme, select the theme and tap Send as  
.
There are several standard ways of entering text in your P910a.  
See ‘Entering text with the flip closed’ on page 32 and ‘Entering  
text with the flip open’ on page 33.  
To delete a theme, select the theme and tap Delete  
.
Control panel  
151  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
2. Select the am/pm box.  
Time & date  
This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format.  
Adjusting the time and date here sets these throughout your  
P910a.  
3. Set Update time. This is useful when you travel between time  
zones.  
The dialog has three tabs. You can set:  
Prompt – The phone asks you if you want to update the  
clock according to the new time zone.  
Time & date  
The current time and date. Here you can also turn  
Summertime (daylight saving time) on or off for your  
location.  
Auto – The phone automatically updates the clock  
according to the new time zone.  
Format  
Specify how you want the time and date to be displayed  
on the screen.  
Off – The clock will not be updated.  
4. Confirm by tapping outside the time picker.  
Workdays  
Specify the days in your working week.  
If the locations you have set under  
Control panel >  
Note These settings are also available in the  
application.  
Time  
International are in a country/region that currently has  
summertime (daylight saving time), you can adjust the time and  
date.  
Time & date tab  
To turn daylight saving time on  
To set the current date  
1. On the Time &date tab, select Summertime, select the check  
1. On the Time & date tab, select the date. A calendar view opens.  
boxes for the zones that currently have daylight saving time.  
Tap the arrows to set the current year and month.  
2. Select Done  
.
2. Select the current date.  
Format tab  
To set the current time  
You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed  
on the screen, and if you want to use the 12-hour (am/pm) or 24-  
hour time format.  
1. On the Time & date tab, select the time. Select the upper half of  
the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or  
the lower half to decrease the number.  
152  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To set the time and date display format  
The Connections tab  
1. Select Date format and choose a format.  
The connections tab contains settings related to how your P910a  
2. Select Date separator and choose a separator.  
communicates with other devices.  
3. Select a Time format  
4. Select Time separator choose a separator.  
5. Select Done  
.
Bluetooth  
.
Bluetooth wireless technology uses radio waves to enable  
wireless connections between your P910a and other Bluetooth-  
enabled devices. This method of linking works well at a range of  
up to 10 meters. Obstructions between the transmitting devices  
will have an effect on the performance. Read more about  
connecting to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology  
in ‘Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology’ on page 136.  
Workdays tab  
You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want  
to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also  
specify the first day of your week to customize the display of  
both Week and Month views in Calendar.  
Bluetooth settings are shown on two tabs:  
Settings  
• A device name for your P910a.  
• Bluetooth on or off.  
• If it should be visible to other Bluetooth equipped  
devices.  
User greeting  
Your P910a can show a user greeting on the standby screen  
when you turn it on. Use this dialog to turn this function on or  
off. You can define your own user greeting text (up to 32  
characters).  
Devices  
A list of all the Bluetooth-enabled devices that your  
P910a is paired (bonded) with.  
• To change the name of a device, and to allow for  
connection without confirmation, select the name in  
the list.  
• To remove a device from the list, select the name and  
select Remove  
• To locate other devices in the vicinity, and add them to  
the list, tap Add  
.
.
Control panel  
153  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tip You will probably find that the preset name of your P910a,  
and of devices you pair it with, are not very meaningful or easily  
recognizable. It is a good idea to change these names to  
something more useful. The name you choose for your P910a  
Cable  
Use Cable to set the cable connection mode and the connection  
parameters used when communicating through your P910a's  
cable port.  
appears on any devices you pair it with.  
Set the cable connection mode. Please note that you must set  
the mode to Modem when using the P910a as a modem and  
when using the DUN (Dial-up Networking) Wizard.  
See ‘Pairing’ on page 136 for instructions on how to connect to  
another device using Bluetooth wireless technology.  
Set the baud rate, parity, number of stop bits, character length  
and type of flow control required for the connection. When  
connecting your P910a via the SyncStation to a USB port on  
your PC, use the following (default) settings:  
Security  
On the Settings tab you can set the Bluetooth security related  
settings of your P910a.  
Bluetooth on  
All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from  
your P910a works. Visibility according to the Visible  
to other devices setting.  
Set Bluetooth to Off if you do not use Bluetooth, it  
will decrease battery drain. Bluetooth will  
automatically switch on if you use Send as >  
Bluetooth from the applications  
Baud rate  
115200  
None  
1
8
Parity  
Stop bits  
Character length  
Flow control  
CTS/RTS  
Tip You can set the cable connection mode when the flip is  
closed by selecting  
Visible to  
other devices  
Selected: All Bluetooth wireless technology  
functionality from your P910a works.  
Applications >  
Connections >  
Cable.  
Cleared: All Bluetooth wireless technology  
functionality from your P910a works but you cannot  
receive beamed items, and other devices cannot  
initiate pairing with your P910a.  
154  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
GSM Networks  
Infrared  
This option lets you choose what network to use when you are  
outside your operator’s area. Choose if you want to search for a  
new network or use a preferred one. You can also make a list of  
preferred networks.  
Use this setting to control the state of the infrared port of your  
P910a.  
Set the infrared status to PC connect or Modem, as required.  
You can set it Off On or On for 10 minutes. Read more about  
connecting to other devices using infrared in ‘Connection via  
Infrared port’ on page 135.  
,
Search mode – Select between automatic or manual search for  
a network.  
Select network – Tap the button to get a list of available  
networks.  
Internet accounts  
New search – Tap the button to search for available networks.  
You access the Internet using an Internet Service Provider (ISP),  
who supplies you with account details including: a username, a  
password, and the phone number or Web site address that your  
P910a automatically uses to access the Internet. You need to set  
up an Internet account before you can:  
Preferred list – Show the networks that your P910a will search  
for when you are outside your home network.  
Note Your operator may not allow you to access all available  
networks.  
Access Web pages and download multimedia messages.  
Set up an email account to send and receive email messages.  
To add a network to the preferred list  
1. Tap Add network  
.
2. Select a network from the displayed list.  
Tip A simple way of setting up an Internet account is to ask  
your service provider to send you a message that contains the  
required information to create an account automatically on your  
P910a.  
3. Select a position in the Preferred list and tap Done  
.
Control panel  
155  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
There are three types of Internet account:  
may be useful if you use different Internet accounts for  
Internet and  
Messages.  
Dial-Up  
:
For Dial-Up (CSD, Circuit Switched Data)  
connections, you are charged for the length of  
time that you are connected to the Internet.  
Whenever you connect to the Internet, your Preferred account is  
the account that your P910a prompts you to use.  
High-Speed Dial-Up  
:
For High-Speed Dial-Up (HSCSD, High Speed  
Circuit Switched Data) connections you are  
charged for the length of time you are  
To create a new Internet account  
1. On the Accounts tab, select New  
.
connected but you can increase the connection  
speed so that information is transferred faster.  
2. Give the account a name. This will be the name shown in  
your list of accounts. (In dialogs that appear while a  
connection is being established the text -GPRS is  
automatically added to names of GPRS accounts.)  
The service must be included in your  
subscription and billing rates from your  
network operator may increase as you increase  
the connection speed.  
3. Choose the Connection type for the type of account that you  
GPRS  
:
For a GPRS connection you are charged for the  
amount of information you view, download, or  
send.  
want to create, GPRS or Dial-Up.  
4. Continue entering settings as required. These will differ  
depending on the type of account: GPRS, Dial-Up or High-  
Speed Dial-Up:  
The dialog has two tabs: Accounts and Other.  
Accounts tab  
The Internet accounts dialog lists all the Internet accounts that  
have been set up on your P910a.  
You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an  
existing account.  
If you want to select an Internet account every time you connect  
to the Internet, select the Show connection dialog check box. This  
156  
Control panel  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
GPRS Advanced tabs  
New  
GPRS account  
Log in  
The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS  
addresses.  
For some accounts you may need to make advanced settings,  
provided by your ISP. Select Advanced and enter settings on the  
tabs as described below  
The DNS address uniquely identifies your Internet  
Service Provider (ISP)'s computers, which your  
P910a uses to connect to the Internet. Your P910a can  
normally fetch these addresses automatically from  
most ISPs.  
If, after setting up an Internet account, you cannot  
connect to the Internet and you suspect these  
addresses are incorrect, ask your ISP for their  
primary and secondary DNS addresses.  
An IP address consists of four 3-digit boxes and valid  
input is between 000 and 255 in each box.  
GPRS Advanced tabs  
Server  
User name and password  
Normally, you do not have to enter a username and  
password when you connect to a GPRS account.  
However, some service providers may require you to  
enter these details.  
If you select the Username and password required  
check box, but do not enter a username and  
password, you will be prompted to enter these when  
the P910a connects.  
Proxy  
Other  
A proxy server is a computer connected between  
your P910a and the computer you communicate with.  
This arrangement can be used for connections to  
Remote Sync servers, or within a company network.  
If this setting is needed, your company's Information  
Services department or Remote Sync provider must  
give you instructions.  
Address  
Enter the Internet address of your access point. The  
address is supplied by your service provider.  
If your ISP supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP)  
extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions  
check box. PPP extensions allow your P910a to  
provide features such as encryption, which increases  
the security of your Internet connection.  
Control panel  
157  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tip To avoid having to change the phone number when you  
travel abroad: enter the international dialing prefix (for  
example '+') and the appropriate country code for your ISP.  
GPRS Advanced tabs  
Authentication is used by some network operators to  
identify the mobile phone connecting to their GPRS  
network. There are different methods, or protocols,  
for doing this.  
For some accounts you may also need to make advanced  
settings.  
Normal: PAP (Password Authentication Protocol).  
The user's username and password are transmitted  
over the network in an unencrypted form.  
Secure: CHAP (Challenge Handshake  
Authentication Protocol). The user's username and  
password are never transmitted over the network.  
None: No authentication is required by the network  
operator.  
Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described  
below  
Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs  
Log in  
The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses.  
For an explanation of these settings, see Log in in the  
‘GPRS Advanced tabs’ on page 157.  
QoS  
Check with your network operator before changing  
any of the QoS (Quality of Service) settings.  
Script  
As an alternative to entering your username and password  
to access the Internet you may need to use a login script  
stored on your P910a. Although uncommon, scripts may  
be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP).  
Select the Use login script check box and enter the script  
The settings Precedence Delay, Peak rate, and Mean  
,
rate are all by default set to Subscribed, which means  
that your operators default QoS (Quality of Service)  
values will apply. Reliability is set as Class 3 by  
default.  
text in the Script editor  
.
If you select the check box Plain text authentication  
(required by some ISPs), the security of your connection  
will decrease during the connection process. Once you  
are connected, the security of your connection will be  
restored.  
New  
Dial-Up or High-Speed Dial-Up account  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your User  
name, your Password, and their Phone number, which your P910a  
dials to connect to the Internet. If you have a High-Speed Dial-  
Up account with your network operator you can increase the  
speed of your connection by making settings on the Speed tab  
under Advanced  
.
158  
Control panel  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To edit an Internet account  
Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up Advanced tabs  
1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list.  
Select the check box Post connect terminal if:  
• The login script of the account that you are setting up  
requires that you input certain information or you will  
need to respond to prompts from the Internet accounts.  
You are connecting to a Dial-Up account that uses Secure  
Access generated by a separate smart card or password  
generator.  
2. Select Edit  
3. Change your settings as desired.  
4. Select Done  
.
.
Note If you change the Connection type, all account data for that  
account will be deleted.  
Proxy  
Speed  
For an explanation of these settings, see Proxy in the  
‘GPRS Advanced tabs’ on page 157.  
To delete an Internet account  
You can only increase the speed of your connection if you  
have a High-Speed Dial-Up account with your network  
operator.  
1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list.  
2. Select Delete  
.
Secure  
To enable secure access for this Internet account you  
must link it to a vendor-associated Secure Token in this  
dialog:  
3. Select Done  
.
Other tab  
1. Select the Enable secure access check box.  
To create or delete Secure Tokens on your P910a, select  
You can use the Dial-up timeout and GPRS timeout settings to set up  
your P910a to disconnect automatically from the Internet, if you  
are not using it. The connection is broken after the period you  
specify has lapsed.  
Control panel > Other >Secure tokens  
.
2. Select the vendor and token names of the Secure Token  
that you want to link to this account from the drop-down  
lists.  
Other  
If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point to  
Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the  
Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow  
your P910a to provide features such as encryption, which  
increases the security of your Internet connection.  
Preferred mode (bearer preference)  
Please note that your P910a can be used for either voice (or  
GSM data) calls or transferring GPRS data, but not both at the  
same time. It may, however, still be connected to GPRS. As an  
example, during GPRS data transfer (Icon:  
) your P910a  
Control panel  
159  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
may not receive incoming calls. As soon as the transfer stops  
(Icon: ) incoming calls will be accepted.  
The Messaging accounts dialog has four tabs, one for each type  
of messaging account:  
Email  
You can have any number of email accounts. To receive  
and send email, you must first set up an Internet account  
(if one is not already set up). See ‘Internet accounts’ on  
page 155.  
Setting the Preferred mode lets you choose how you want to use  
your P910a:  
Select GPRS only if you do not want to be disturbed by  
incoming phone calls while browsing the Web. All incoming  
voice (and GSM data) calls are rejected. If you disconnect  
from the Internet, incoming calls can be received. Outgoing  
calls are possible, except during data transfer. This mode is  
useful if you are using sensitive Internet services, such as  
banking.  
SMS  
MMS  
You can only have one SMS (Short Message Service)  
account.The settings on this tab also apply to EMS  
(Extended Message Service) messages.  
You can only have one MMS (Multimedia Messaging  
Service) account. To receive MMS messages you must  
first set up Internet and WAP accounts (if not already set  
up). See‘Internet accounts’ on page 155.  
If you select GSM only, your P910a will not be connected to  
the GPRS network. If you choose to download email or  
browse the Web, your P910a will connect to GPRS only as  
long as is needed for the data connection.  
Area  
You can only have one Area info account. The number of  
Area Information channels that you can subscribe to is  
limited by the space on your SIM.  
If you select Automatic, your P910a will let you answer  
incoming GSM calls while having normal GPRS  
functionality. A GPRS data connection will be temporarily  
interrupted by a voice call.  
Tip A simple way of setting up an email or multimedia message  
account is to ask your service provider to send you a message  
that contains the required information to create an account  
automatically on your P910a.  
Read more about the different types of messages in ‘Messages’  
on page 86.  
Messaging accounts  
The  
Messages application can handle many different types  
of messages, but you must first set up accounts and make  
settings as described below.  
160  
Control panel  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Email tab  
Email account Inbox tab settings  
Username  
Password  
Incoming server  
address  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you  
with your username, your password, and its  
incoming server address, which identifies the  
computer where your incoming email messages  
are stored.  
The Email tab shows a list of the email accounts on your  
P910a.You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an  
existing account.  
You can choose one of your email accounts as Preferred. This  
will be the email account that your P910a uses when you use  
Send as to send an entry as email directly from one of your  
P910a applications  
Open in full  
screen  
Select to open messages in full screen portrait  
view.  
Download  
If you want to limit the data traffic, you can choose  
to receive just Just headers (the sender, subject,  
and date only) or set a size limit (if a message is  
larger than the Smaller than limit, only the headers  
are downloaded). You can download the complete  
message later. You can also set a limit to the total  
number of messages held in your email account at  
any one time.  
To create a new email account  
1. On the Email tab, select New.  
2. Enter the following settings on the tabs:  
Email account basic tab settings  
Account name  
Your name  
This is the name you give to your email account.  
Schedule  
Select Schedule to schedule an automatic  
download of your incoming email messages.  
Messages that are waiting in your Outbox will not  
be sent at the same time.  
This name appears on your outgoing email  
messages.  
Email address  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you  
with your email address.  
Connection type  
Select POP3 or IMAP. POP3 is most common.  
IMAP makes it possible to subscribe to server  
based folders.  
Internet account  
Select the Internet account to access your email  
messages.  
Control panel  
161  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Email account Outbox tab settings  
Email account Advanced tab settings  
Outgoing server  
address  
Incoming mail  
port  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you  
with its Outgoing server address, which identifies  
the computer through which your outgoing email  
messages are sent.  
Normally 110. Do not change unless your ISP  
instructs you to.  
Secure  
password  
authentication  
A secure connection means that all information  
(including your username, password, and all  
messages) is encrypted to maximize security while  
you are connected to the Internet. In contrast,  
secure password authentication means that only  
your password is encrypted.  
Use SMTP  
authentication  
Some SMTP servers might also require  
authentication when sending email. In that case,  
select the check box Use SMTP authentication and  
enter your User name and Password  
.
Use Inbox login  
details  
If the SMTP server accepts using your Inbox login  
information for authentication, select the check  
To edit an email account  
box Use Inbox login details  
.
1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list.  
2. Select Edit  
3. Change your settings as desired.  
4. Select Done  
.
Email account Advanced tab settings  
Secure  
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will tell you  
connection  
whether you can use either a Secure connection or  
.
Secure password authentication  
.
Outgoing mail  
port  
To delete an email account  
Normally 25. Do not change unless your ISP  
instructs you to.  
1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list.  
Use MIME  
encoding  
MIME encoding is a standard that allows non-  
textual information (for example graphics) and  
accented characters to be sent in email messages.  
2. Select Delete  
.
3. Select Yes  
.
If you should not wish to Use MIME encoding  
,
clear the check box.  
162  
Control panel  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
SMS tab  
MMS tab  
Use these settings to set up text messaging and EMS  
messaging:  
Use these settings to set up multimedia messaging:  
Messaging accounts MMS tab settings  
Messaging accounts SMS tab settings  
Service center  
address  
The MMS Service center address is the URL to the  
server on which your multimedia messages are  
stored. Your MMS service provider or your network  
operator can provide you with the service center  
address.  
SMS Service  
center address  
The SMS Service center address is the phone  
number where your text messages are stored. It is  
normally imported from the SIM card but if that  
fails, your network operator can provide you with  
the service center address.  
WAP account  
Automatic  
Specify which of your configured WAP accounts  
you wish to use.  
WAP accounts are created in Control panel >  
Connections > WAP accounts  
Character Set  
Your network operator may also specify the  
Character set  
.
Messages stored  
for  
You can set a time limit after which text messages  
are deleted from the network by choosing a value  
in the Messages stored for list.  
Select between:  
Off - automatic download is off, you will receive  
notifications of incoming messages and have to  
download them manually.  
Home only - messages are downloaded  
automatically when you are connected to your  
home network.  
Connection type  
Specify if you prefer to use GPRS or GSM  
connection as directed by your network operator.  
Tip If you send and receive text messages in several countries,  
you can avoid having to change the service center address when  
you travel abroad by entering the international dialing prefix  
(for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your  
network operator.  
On - messages are also downloaded automatically  
when you are roaming outside your home network.  
Set whether or not to have a size limit for incoming  
messages:  
Download size  
and  
Smaller than  
No restrictions - the size of the incoming messages  
does not matter, all messages will be received.  
Smaller than - messages smaller than the limit will  
be received, bigger messages will be deflected.  
Control panel  
163  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Advanced settings  
MMS Advanced settings tabs  
Select Advanced to make settings about how your P910a will  
send and receive multimedia messages.  
Receive  
These settings apply to multimedia messages that you  
receive.  
Select the Play full screen checkbox, when you want to  
play MMS messages in full screen.  
Select the check boxes to send a notification message to the  
sender when a message is:  
• Delivered to you: Allow delivery notification  
• Read by you: Allow read notification  
MMS Advanced settings tabs  
Send  
The values you give these settings will be default for all  
multimedia messages that you send. You can of course  
choose other values for an individual message in Messages.  
You can set the Validity period for your messages, that is,  
how long they should be available to the receiver.  
Maximum is the default.  
You can filter reception of incoming messages by message  
type (Advertisements Information) or from senders not  
,
You can give your messages a Priority of Low  
,
Normal  
listed in Contacts (Anonymous senders). Selecting a check  
box will filter out messages of that category.  
(default) or High  
.
To receive multimedia messages only from senders listed  
in your Contacts, select all other check boxes and clear the  
You can set Content alert for the multimedia messages you  
create to help you check content.  
check box for Anonymous senders  
.
If you select Warning, a warning message is displayed  
whenever you add a non-conformant item to a multimedia  
message. You have the option to send anyway. If you select  
Restricted, the message will not be sent in the situation  
described above. Free means no restrictions.  
Area tab  
On the Area tab you make settings related to Cell Broadcast  
Services. These include both Area Information and Cell  
Information services. The availability of Cell and Area  
Information Services is operator-dependent.  
Select the check boxes to provide the function you want:  
Hide number prevents the sent message from showing your  
number.  
Read report requests a read notification from receivers of  
your messages.  
Delivery report requests a delivery notification from  
receivers of your messages.  
Your network may broadcast the area code as cell information.  
Your P910a can display it below the network name in the flip  
closed standby view.  
Reply with history includes the original with your reply.  
164  
Control panel  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Area Information is a type of text message that is sent to all  
subscribers in a certain network area, for example a local traffic  
report.  
To delete a channel  
Select Delete. Since deleting a channel cannot be undone, you  
will be asked to confirm the delete. Deleting the channel will  
also delete any stored Area Information messages for that  
channel in your Area Info Inbox.  
To enable Cell Information  
Select the Cell information check box  
To turn Area Information on  
WAP accounts  
1. Check the Area information check box. Received messages  
will be automatically stored, and displayed in the list when  
dismissed.  
Use these settings to set up and manage WAP accounts on your  
P910a.  
WAP accounts are intended for multimedia messages and for  
accessing the Internet through a WAP gateway. (Such gateways  
make use of proxy port 9200-9203.) All other proxy settings  
should be included in your Internet accounts.  
2. The list shows all the channels that you have defined on your  
P910a. The check box for each channel shows if it is on  
(selected, ready to receive messages) or off (cleared, not  
active):  
For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for  
example online banking, can only be accessed from a particular  
WAP account.  
To add a new channel  
1. Select New  
.
2. Enter the number of the new channel in the New Channel  
dialog. Channel numbers can be from 0 to 999. If there are  
too many channels defined, New will be disabled and you will  
The dialog has two tabs: Basic and Preferred.  
Basic tab  
see a message: Maximum channels on SIM  
.
Channel numbering is operator-dependent. Please consult  
your network operator for information.  
The dialog shows a list of all the WAP accounts on your P910a.  
You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an  
existing account.  
To turn a channel on or off  
Select the channel in the list and select the check box. To turn it  
off, clear the check box.  
Control panel  
165  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service  
Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must  
choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a  
new one.  
The Other tab  
The other tab contains all settings that are not related to the  
device or connections. This is also where settings from system  
components and add-ons, developed by third-party developers,  
will be found.  
To create a new WAP account  
1. Enter the name of the WAP account.  
2. Select the Internet account you want to use. Preferred  
indicates the account set as preferred in the Internet setup.  
Certificate manager  
3. If you are going to use a WAP gateway or a proxy, select the  
Digital certificates ensure that the Web or WAP pages you visit,  
or any software you install, really are created by the person you  
expect.  
Use Proxy check box.  
4. Enter the Address of the gateway or proxy.  
5. Enter the Port of the gateway or proxy.  
Certificates may be present on the pages that you view or the  
software that you download. Your P910a compares these  
certificates with a set of certificates that are stored in Certificate  
manager to ensure the authenticity of the page or software. If the  
certificates do not match, your P910a informs you, and gives  
you the following choices:  
For a WAP gateway use:  
9201 for a normal connection.  
9203 for an encrypted secure connection.  
6. If the gateway/proxy requires Username and Password, which  
is very unusual, fill in the last two fields in the dialog.  
Prevent the page being loaded or the software being installed.  
Continue at your own risk.  
Preferred tab  
Select the check box to set a preferred WAP account. It will be  
The certificates on your P910a have been created and issued by  
an independent organization that ensures their authenticity.  
used when you use the Open page command in the  
Internet  
application and when a page is opened from another P910a  
application. If you do not set a preferred WAP account, the  
preferred Internet account will be used when connecting to the  
Internet.  
166  
Control panel  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Security information  
Type of certificate  
Security information is displayed when Certificate manager  
cannot be sure of the origin of the page or software. For  
example, security information will be displayed if:  
The type can be either User or Certificate Authority.  
User certificates contain your identity. This type of certificate  
is used when the server asks for client authentication. The  
client application requests you to identify yourself by  
choosing a user certificate.  
The certificate on a page has expired.  
The identity of a software manufacturer cannot be verified.  
Certificate Authority certificates contain server details. This  
type of certificate is handled by your P910a when the server  
only requires server authentication. This means that your  
identity remains anonymous.  
Security information is also displayed when a certificate on your  
P910a has:  
Expired.  
Been revoked by the independent organization that issued it.  
Flip settings  
Adding and deleting certificates  
Flip keyboard - Specify the keyboard your P910a has on the  
Your P910a handles certificates automatically so, most of the  
time, you can browse the Internet securely without using  
Certificate manager. If you do need to add or delete a certificate,  
you will usually be informed by your network operator or  
system administrator. You should delete a certificate from  
Certificate manager if you are informed, or suspect, that:  
inside of the flip.  
Enable virtual flip - Select the check box to use of the Virtual flip  
when the flip of your P910a has been removed.  
Format disk  
The certificate does not belong to the person who supplied it.  
This dialog primarily lets you rename and format any Memory  
Stick that you install in your P910a. Your P910a comes with one  
Memory Stick.  
The certificate was issued incorrectly by the independent  
organization that created it.  
Control panel  
167  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
When you format a disk, you delete all the information on it,  
including any applications that you may have installed. You also  
delete all information placed on it by other devices (these  
folders are hidden except in File Manager).  
To conserve storage space only a limited set of languages is  
loaded on your P910a at delivery. When you select one of the  
languages from the list the unused languages in the set are  
deleted from the memory of your P910a. You can, at any time,  
download additional languages from  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
IP Security manager  
The IP security manager displays stored policies and only one  
policy can be activated at a time.This is used for secure  
connections over the Internet, typically to a corporate intranet. If  
needed, your company information services department will  
supply the necessary information.  
Master reset  
Use Master reset to reset your P910a.  
Note All user data, as well as pre-installed media files and  
application data files (including, for example, backgrounds,  
ring signals and pictures), will be deleted and settings will be set  
to the state they were, after you selected the language. The  
selected local language will be restored.  
There are two types of passwords needed:  
IP security password: is to be set when activating the very  
first policy, that is, this password is only set once, but it is  
possible to change it later at any time by tapping the  
Password button.  
If you have backed up your user data, you can restore it from the  
backup, see ‘Restoring data’ on page 142.  
Activation password: is needed when a policy is activated  
for the first time and the supplier of the policy gives this.  
You can restore media files and application data files from the  
Content and Application CD, or from the Web.  
If you want to keep installed applications, clear the Delete user  
installed applications check box.  
Language selection  
Use this list of all languages stored on your P910a to change  
language. The highlighted entry is the language presently in use.  
You can delete all languages except English.  
168  
Control panel  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
you use your P910a as a Hard Token). You can configure as  
many tokens as needed.  
Secure tokens  
If you need access to a network that requires secure access  
Tip Dialog details when using secure access are vendor, system  
and network-specific. You should contact the administrator of  
the network you wish to access to get the correct information.  
(often known as ‘strong authentication’), for example a  
corporate intranet, you can set up the Internet account you use to  
log in to that network to use secure access and generate the  
required one-time password when you make the connection.  
Your P910a supports the following secure access systems:  
Storage manager  
SecureID from RSA  
The list shows the applications on your P910a and the space  
they occupy. Tapping the Files button lets you manage general  
files stored internally on the P910a or on a Memory Stick.  
SafeWord from Secure Computing  
It is also possible to add other access systems through third-  
party software.  
Deleting information from applications  
If you have a separate device or application that requires one-  
time passwords according to one of these systems, you do not  
need a separate hardware token generator (Hard Token). Your  
P910a can generate passwords that are not associated with an  
Internet account.  
To delete information from an application: select an application  
in the list. This application is then displayed. Delete the old or  
unwanted entries or information.  
Here are some housekeeping tips for different applications:  
You manage secure access in your P910a using Secure Tokens.  
Delete any unwanted recordings as even short ones occupy a  
lot of space.  
Each token is associated with one vendor/system and may be  
associated with one or more Internet accounts (or none, when  
In  
Messages, delete any old messages from your Inbox or  
Sent folders.  
In  
Calendar, delete all entries in a specified time period by  
selecting Calendar > Remove entries in your list of entries.  
Control panel  
169  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
In  
Tasks, delete all completed entries by selecting  
To uninstall applications  
Tasks > Delete completed in your list of entries.  
1. Select Uninstall.  
Throughout your P910a, use folders as you create and  
receive information to speed up housekeeping later.  
A list of applications that can be uninstalled is shown.  
2. Select the application to uninstall.  
3. Select Uninstall.  
Deleting or copying general files  
Note You cannot uninstall the standard applications that come  
with your P910a.  
Tap Files to see lists of all stored general file types on your  
P910a and the Memory Stick. You can copy files to a specified  
folder, delete unwanted files, and launch the appropriate  
application to view or play a file in the list.  
WIM PIN settings  
To delete files or copy files between folders  
1. Select Files.  
WIM (WAP Identity Module) is used for performing security  
functions, especially to store and process information needed for  
user identification and authentication. It is a tamper-resistant  
store for private keys, certificates and other items that may  
require a PIN for access or modification.  
2. Select the Type of file to move or delete.  
3. Select the Location folder.  
4. Tap one or more check boxes to select the files to copy or  
delete.  
The WIM management dialog consists of a PIN choice list and a  
WIM items list.  
5. To copy files, tap Copy and select the destination folder.  
To delete files, tap Delete. You will be asked to confirm.  
You can select a PIN from the PIN choice list. The WIM items  
list changes content dynamically, displaying only the keys that  
are protected by the selected PIN and also have an associated  
certificate. Other keys that are protected by the selected PIN but  
do not have an associated certificate are not shown in the WIM  
item list. This is the case when WIM PIN (PIN-G) is selected.  
Uninstalling applications  
If you uninstall an application, you can always reinstall it if you  
want to use it later.  
170  
Control panel  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Note The PIN-G applies to the whole WIM and any items that  
do not have a different PIN. This means that no specific items on  
the WIM are linked to PIN-G.  
You can change status of a PIN:  
Enable PIN A PIN code that is enabled is requested for  
authorization of an operation. To proceed with the operation  
you must enter the PIN code.  
Disable PIN A PIN code that is disabled is not requested to  
authorize an operation to proceed.  
To change the PIN code  
1. Select the PIN you want to change from the choice list.  
2. Select Change PIN  
.
If a PIN code has been blocked, you must unblock it before it  
can be used again. Select the PIN and select Change PIN  
.
Control panel  
171  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
Connection type  
When your P910a connects to a service provider, it will use a  
GSM or GPRS network provided by a network operator. Many  
network operators offer both GPRS and GSM services.  
Introduction  
Before you can use  
Internet and  
Messages to access the  
Internet and send or receive messages, you will need to make  
some user-specific settings in the  
Control Panel.  
The connection type defines which network your account uses  
to connect to the Internet. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS  
network, and Dial-Up Internet accounts use the GSM network.  
Service provider  
You will need a service provider to connect your P910a to the  
network.The service provider could be:  
GPRS  
If your network operator supports GPRS, a GPRS Internet  
account allows you to:  
An Internet Service Provider (ISP) which connects you to the  
Internet.  
An access point provided by your network operator.  
Remain permanently connected to the Internet without being  
charged for connection time. With a GPRS account, you are  
charged for the amount of information you view, download  
or send when your are connected to the Internet. Check your  
operator for details of your subscription.  
A private service provider such as your company or your  
bank.  
You will need to enter specific service provider details into your  
P910a to set up an Internet account. It can hold the details of  
multiple service providers, for example, you may have separate  
Internet and corporate accounts.  
Avoid having to reconnect to the Internet if the connection is  
broken.  
Dial-Up  
Your network operator or retailer may have pre-installed  
services, check with them.  
For both Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up accounts, you are  
charged for the length of time you are connected. If your  
network operator supports them, you can increase your  
connection speed (at a cost) by setting up a high-speed account.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
172  
           
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Accepting new Internet or Messages  
settings  
Automatically set up service  
provider and messaging  
New phone set-up messages will appear in the Auto setup  
The easiest way to set up your P910a is automatically, through  
your service provider.  
account inbox of  
Messages. (Phone set-up messages for  
email accounts will, however, be found in your SMS message  
inbox.)  
For  
of:  
Messages settings your P910a supports automatic setup  
When an phone set-up message appears, select it.  
email accounts  
A dialog with a brief text and operator message appears on the  
screen. You can accept the new settings or leave the message in  
MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service) settings.  
the inbox  
.
Check your service provider's Web site for information or  
contact their support desk and ask about automatic remote  
phone set-up of ISP (Internet Service Provider) settings, email  
and MMS message settings.  
If the name of the new account is the same as that of an existing  
account you can choose to create a new account with the same  
name or replace the existing account.  
Note Never accept remote phone set-up messages if you are not  
expecting them or are unsure where they have come from.  
If remote phone set-up is possible, they will send you the phone  
set-up messages required by SMS message.  
Settings valid for your network operator and one or more of  
these services may also be available through the phone setup-  
message generator at www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
Manually set up service  
provider  
To check that your SMS messaging settings are correct  
As an alternative to setting up an Internet account automatically,  
1. Select  
Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >  
you can enter the settings manually from  
Connections > Internet accounts.  
Control panel >  
SMS.  
2. Check the information, for example the address of the service  
center.  
173  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain  
this information from your ISP (Internet Service Provider), or if  
you are connecting to a corporate network, your information  
services department.  
The dialog has four tabs, one for each type of messaging  
service:  
email  
The provider of your email service, or for a corporate  
account, your information services manager can provide  
you with the necessary details.  
All settings are described in ‘Internet accounts’ on page 155.  
All settings are described in ‘Email tab’ on page 161.  
To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a  
new email account’ on page 161.  
To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a new  
Internet account’ on page 156.  
SMS  
Short Message Service  
message  
The necessary settings are usually provided on your SIM  
card.  
All settings are described in ‘SMS tab’ on page 163.  
As an alternative to setting up Messages automatically, you can  
MMS  
message  
Multimedia Messaging Service  
Your MMS messaging provider will be able to provide you  
with the necessary information.  
Before you set up MMS messaging you need to set up an  
Internet account in Control panel > Connections > Internet  
accounts and a WAP account in Control panel >  
Connections > WAP accounts  
enter the settings for the messaging services you want to use  
yourself from  
Control panel > Connections > Messaging  
accounts  
.
First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain  
this information from the following sources:  
All settings are described in ‘MMS tab’ on page 163.  
If your network operator offers an email service you can get  
the necessary details from them.  
Area  
Cell Broadcast Service: Area and Cell information  
Your network operator will be able to inform you if these  
services are available.  
Your Internet service provider.  
Your information services manager in the case of connecting  
to the corporate network to access your work email account.  
All settings are described in ‘Area tab’ on page 164.  
Your network operator in the case of SMS message and Cell  
Broadcast Services.  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
174  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain  
Setting up WAP accounts  
this information from the WAP service provider, or if you are  
A WAP account (sometimes called a WAP profile) defines a  
connecting to a corporate network, your information services  
service provider and gateway that should be used when making  
manager.  
a connection to WAP services. You also need a WAP account  
when you use MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service).  
All settings are described in ‘WAP accounts’ on page 165.  
To set up a new account follow the steps under ‘To create a new  
WAP account’ on page 166.  
The WAP gateway sits between your P910a and the WAP site  
coding and decoding information. You can set up details of more  
than one gateway if necessary, for example one for your MMS  
messaging, one to access corporate data over WAP, and another  
to access your bank's WAP service.  
Using your P910a as a modem  
Your P910a contains a complete GSM/GPRS modem, so you  
can use it to connect your PC to the Internet or corporate  
intranet.Your P910a appears to the laptop like a normal modem.  
The easiest way to set up a WAP account on your P910a is  
automatically, through your service provider. Check your  
service provider's Web site for information or contact their  
support desk and ask about automatic setup. You can also find  
more information, and settings for many operators on:  
http://www.SonyEricsson.com/support.  
You link the laptop to your P910a using Bluetooth wireless  
technology, infrared, or cable (USB or serial).The connection  
over the air can be by any of the bearers that your P910a  
supports:  
Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service  
Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must  
choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a  
new one.  
GPRS  
HSCSD (High-speed Circuit Switched Data)  
CSD (Circuit Switched Data).  
Manually set up a WAP account  
Instead of setting up a WAP account automatically, you can  
A Windows modem driver file and a PC utility, the Dial-Up  
Networking Wizard, is provided on your Sony Ericsson PC Suite  
CD. The wizard will help you configure DUN (Dial-Up  
enter the settings manually from  
Control panel > Connections >  
WAP accounts  
.
175  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Networking) entries on your PC for GPRS and HSCSD  
connections.  
must be connected to the PC via cable, infrared or Bluetooth  
wireless technology. See ‘Connecting to other devices’ on  
page 134.  
Once paired with a Bluetooth-enabled laptop, your P910a is  
ready to make a connection to the Internet or corporate network.  
Since Bluetooth is wire-free and requires no line-of-sight  
alignment, you can place the laptop in a comfortable position  
and let your P910a remain in your pocket, briefcase, or even be  
placed up to 10 meters away.  
Make sure that you have any information concerning, for  
example, phone numbers, names of servers or domains, that the  
server that you want to connect to may require.  
To set up a GPRS or HSCSD (High-Speed Circuit Switched  
Data) connection using the Dial-Up Networking Wizard  
If you wish to use an infrared link, the range is typically up to  
one meter. The two infrared ports must be kept in line of sight, at  
an angle of no more than approximately 30 degrees.  
1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson  
folder of the Start menu on your PC.  
2. Choose Create a new Dial-Up connection.  
3. Follow the instructions in the wizard.  
The Dial-Up Networking Wizard  
The wizard simplifies creating GPRS DUN connections by  
setting the proper values in the PC DUN entry and linking the  
entry to one of the GPRS configurations in your P910a. You can  
also view and modify the GPRS settings in the P910a.  
To edit a previously created DUN entry  
1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson  
folder of the Start menu on your PC.  
2. Modify a Dial-Up connection.  
For HSCSD DUN entries, the wizard updates the modem  
settings such that the specified data rate and type of bearer  
(ISDN / Analogue) will be used when you make a DUN  
connection.  
3. Select the desired connection from the list.  
4. Follow the instructions in the wizard.  
To define P910a as a modem  
To set up a CSD (GSM Data) or HSCSD connection you will  
need to install your P910a as a modem manually.  
You can view or change the DUN entries created with the  
wizard using the standard Windows DUN user interface.  
The Dial-Up Networking Wizard software included in the Sony  
Ericsson PC Suite must be installed in your PC and your P910a  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
176  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To set up a Dial-Up entry for CSD or HSCSD  
GPRS - connection information  
1. On the PC, open the Control Panel.  
Icons on the status bar let you overview the information on data  
2. Choose to install a new modem.  
connection calls.  
3. Choose your P910a as the modem.  
4. Select the port where the P910a is connected.  
A combined signal strength and GPRS signal icon provides  
information on the GPRS service status. The GPRS connection  
status appears above the signal strength icon. There are three  
5. Confirm the selection. A new DUN connection has been  
created.  
states for the icon, unavailable  
attached  
, available  
and  
.
Connecting  
The HSCSD/CSD  
a data connection. Where GPRS is suspended, for example, the  
GPRS suspended state is indicated by a combined icon  
There are three states for the GPRS icon: Active  
active transferring data (alternates between and  
and suspended . Any data transfer either received or sent  
and GPRS  
icons are displayed during  
To connect using a DUN entry created by the wizard  
.
1. If you are connecting by cable, set your P910a to Modem  
,
cable connection mode, see ‘Cable’ on page 154.  
)
2. Use any conventional method to make a connection:  
– Click the Desktop shortcut created by the wizard.  
– Select the entry from within the system DUN folder.  
activates the GPRS active icon for 5 seconds.  
Connection information  
When you select the data connection icon, during an active data  
connection, a menu appears with the choices Information and  
– Run an application that has built-in support for using  
DUN entries (for example a browser or email client).  
Disconnect  
.
Select Information to view information on the connection.  
Select Disconnect to end the connection.  
177  
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
To reset the log of an account  
GPRS status information  
1. Select an account in the list.  
When the signal strength icon is selected, network, GPRS status  
information and, if applicable, GPRS error text appear.  
2. Select GPRS data log > Reset  
.
To delete or reset the log of several accounts  
GPRS data log  
1. Select the check boxes of the accounts in the list to be deleted  
or reset.  
A new GPRS data log entry is created when a GPRS account  
establishes a connection for the first time. It does not wait for  
transfer data. If there is an existing data log associated with the  
current GPRS connection, this is updated.  
2. Select GPRS data log > Reset or GPRS data log > Delete  
.
Session data  
The GPRS data log shows a list of GPRS Internet accounts.  
Where one account is active or suspended, the relevant status  
icon is displayed to the left of the account.  
When the connection is deactivated, for example when the  
current Internet account is disconnected, the total data sent and  
received in the last session is displayed.  
The information is displayed for a couple of seconds. To dismiss  
To view information on an account  
the information when the flip is closed, press  
.
1. Select an account in the list.  
2. Information on the account is shown. The data log is updated  
dynamically.  
Buttons allow you to delete or reset the current data. These  
buttons are disabled during an active or suspended  
connection.  
To delete the log for an account  
1. Select an account in the list.  
2. Select GPRS data log > Delete  
.
Getting started with Internet and Messages  
178  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
REFERENCE  
Troubleshooting  
This chapter consists of a selection of suggestions for solving  
possible problems with your P910a. If this does not help, please  
Start-up problems  
try the Knowledge base on the global support site,  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support. There you also find other  
information that can be helpful.  
P910a will not  
start  
• Handheld phone: recharge or replace the battery.  
• Make sure the contacts on the battery and  
charger are clean and avoid charging the battery  
in extreme temperatures.  
Your P910a also contains help files with additional information.  
Access help with the menu option Edit > Help or, in many dialog  
Vehicle Handsfree: check that the P910a is  
properly inserted into the holder and check the  
fuse in the fuse holder (connected to the battery  
cable).  
boxes, with the help icon  
.
To improve performance, you can update the software of your  
P910a. See “Sony Ericsson Update Service” on page 133.  
Lock problems  
If you need to hand in your P910a for repair, please note that  
you may lose information and content that you have saved in  
your P910a. You are advised to make a copy of such information  
(make a backup) before handing your P910a in for repair.  
Insert card  
• Make sure a SIM card is activated and inserted  
into your P910a. See ‘SIM card’ on page 12.  
Blocked SIM  
card  
If your PIN is entered incorrectly three times in a  
row, the SIM card will be blocked. You can  
unblock it by using your PUK. See ‘SIM card lock’  
on page 37.  
Troubleshooting  
179  
       
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Device lock  
Phone locked is displayed followed by the prompt  
Communication problems  
Enter lock code  
.
Telephone does • The received signal can be too weak, possibly  
Your P910a is locked to prevent unauthorized use.  
To unlock the P910a:  
• Enter your device lock code, 0000 by default,  
not work  
because you are being shielded from the signal.  
Check your display signal strength indicator.  
Move outdoors or up from the ground to obtain a  
sufficiently strong signal.  
then press  
or  
.
• Make sure the P910a is not set in Flight mode.  
Key symbol  
The keypad is locked to prevent unintentional key  
action.  
Your P910a might be busy sending or receiving  
data or email.  
Press  
keys.  
followed by  
to unlock the  
• Check the settings for forwarding or restricting  
calls. See ‘Forward calls’ on page 54, ‘Accept  
calls’ on page 54 and ‘Restrict calls’ on page 55.  
Indicator light  
Flashes red  
This indicates that the battery is running low and  
soon needs recharging or replacing with a spare.  
• With Vehicle Handsfree (VHF) equipment, make  
sure that the following are inserted or connected:  
Your P910a and its holder, the fuse in the fuse  
holder, and/or the external antenna.  
• If Emergency calls only is displayed on the  
screen, you are not allowed to use the network  
within range. You can, however, usually make an  
emergency call using the emergency number.  
• If No network is displayed on the screen, you are  
in an area that is not covered by a network or the  
received signal is too weak.  
Does not flash  
If the indicator light at the top of your P910a does  
not flash and no network is displayed there is no  
network within range. See ‘Telephone does not  
work’ on page 180.  
Cannot hear  
incoming call  
• Increase the ring signal volume.  
Your P910a is set in silent mode.  
Your P910a is set in Flight mode.  
180  
Troubleshooting  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
The person I  
am talking to  
has a problem  
hearing what I  
am saying  
• Make sure you do not cover the microphone  
when you talk. You find the microphone at the  
bottom of the phone, next to the connector.  
Cannot use  
email  
• Check with your service provider that your  
subscription includes email.  
• The settings might not be correct. Enter new  
settings. Use the phone setup-message generator  
for email on www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
to send you an auto setup message, or contact  
your service provider. See also “Email tab” on  
page 161.  
You could be almost out of network range. The  
sound improves with a better network  
connection.  
Cannot use  
WAP  
Your subscription does not include WAP. Check  
with your service provider.  
Fax calls  
Your P910a does not support fax transmission.  
Even if your operator subscription supports fax  
transmission, fax calls will be rejected. However,  
they can be forwarded to another number such as  
the office fax number, see ‘Forward calls’ on  
page 54 for more information.  
• The settings are not correct. Enter new settings.  
Contact you service provider or visit  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support and use the  
WAP phone setup-message generator.  
Cannot send  
nor receive  
SMS or MMS  
Your subscription does not include SMS or  
MMS. Check with your service provider.  
• Make sure potential fax callers do not try to send  
a fax to your P910a as they can experience a  
number of retries before the fax transmission is  
stopped.  
• Check with you service provider that you have  
entered the correct Service Center phone  
number.  
• Check the settings in the Control panel. Contact  
you service provider or visit  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support and use the  
MMS phone setup-message generator.  
• Make sure that Flight mode is deactivated.  
• Phone memory might be full. Delete some  
pictures or music, for example.  
Troubleshooting  
181  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Cannot  
establish  
• Make sure that the devices are correctly paired.  
See ‘Connection via Bluetooth wireless  
technology’ on page 136.  
Problems to connect to a PC or another device  
Not possible to • Make sure that the SyncStation and cable is  
connection with  
a Bluetooth  
wireless  
technology  
handset or  
handsfree  
establish  
correctly connected to the PC.  
• Make sure that the handset or handsfree is  
charged.  
connection  
using cable  
• Make sure that the correct COM port on the PC  
is enabled. Right-click the P910a link symbol in  
the PC taskbar, and select Properties. Select the  
USB COM port.  
• Make sure that the devices are in range with each  
other.  
• Make sure the device lock is not active.  
Cannot find PC You can find PC software on  
• Uninstall Sony Ericsson PC Suite. Connect the  
SyncStation with the P910a to the PC. Reinstall  
Sony Ericsson PC Suite, following the  
installation procedure carefully.  
software for  
downloading  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support and also on  
local sites.  
Cannot use my • First ask your service provider to enable your  
• Check for Sony Ericsson PC Suite updates on  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support. If you find  
a new version of the program, download it and  
install this instead of the old one.  
P910a as a  
modem  
data connection.  
• Then connect your P910a to your PC with cable,  
Bluetooth technology, or infrared. See “Using  
your P910a as a modem” on page 175,  
“Connecting to other devices” on page 134, and  
Knowledge base on  
Cannottransfer Place the P910a in the SyncStation. In the PC,  
pictures  
open My P910a and browse through the P910a file  
system to find the picture.  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
Cannottransfer • Make sure that Bluetooth wireless technology is  
items with  
Bluetooth  
wireless  
activated.  
• Make sure that the devices are in range with each  
other. Maximum range is 10 meters.  
technology  
182  
Troubleshooting  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Cannot  
synchronize  
with my PC  
• Connect to your PC with cable, Bluetooth  
technology, or infrared. See “Connecting to  
other devices” on page 134.  
Storage  
Manager  
You can also use the storage manager to free up  
memory.  
• Select  
Applications >  
Control  
• Then install Sony Ericsson PC Suite, and make  
necessary settings. See “Synchronization and  
backup” on page 139 and the help files in Sony  
Ericsson PC Suite. See also Knowledge base on  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
panel > Other > Storage manager.  
• A list of all applications and their memory  
requirements is shown.  
• See ‘Deleting or copying general files’ on  
page 170 and ‘Deleting information from  
applications’ on page 169.  
Memory full  
When your P910a has no more space available to  
Information in Use the applications to remove unused or old items  
save or store information, the icon  
is shown in  
applications  
from the P910a internal memory:  
WAP history or bookmarks.  
• Messages.  
the status bar. You must then free up memory to  
ensure the proper functioning of the P910a.  
• Make sure regular backups are made with  
Communications Suite to reduce the risk of lost  
or corrupted information.  
• Contacts.  
• Call logs.  
• Calendar tasks or appointments.  
• Jotter notes.  
Storage Wizard  
• Tap the icon  
in the status bar to start the  
Miscellaneous  
Storage Wizard, or start it in the application  
launcher. Then use the storage wizard to move  
items from the P910a internal memory to a  
Memory Stick, or remove items from the P910a  
memory.  
Cannot save on You might have a Memory Stick with a lock  
Memory Stick  
switch. Move the switch in the other direction.  
• The Memory Stick might be full. Delete some  
files on it.  
Troubleshooting  
183  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Tap on display  
does not work  
Applications  
stop responding  
• Close the flip and open it again.  
Occasionally you may find that you tap one  
item (for example a button or menu option)  
but another is activated. Calibrating the  
screen ensures that the correct item is  
activated. Tap Control panel > Device tab >  
Display > Screen tab > Calibrate screen and  
follow the instructions.  
• Turn off the P910a and turn it on again.  
• Remove the battery, wait about 10 seconds, and  
insert it again.  
• Phone memory might be full. Delete some  
pictures or music, for example.  
• If the problem continues, do a master reset. See  
‘Master reset’ on page 168. All data will be lost.  
Cannot change • The first time you start the P910a you select a  
language  
language. All other languages are then deleted, in  
order to free memory. You can find all languages  
on the Sony Ericsson PC Suite CD. From the CD,  
you can install the language you want. You can  
find more languages on  
System failure  
In the case of a system failure, your P910a will  
flash an animated warning. To recover, please  
restart the P910a like this:  
• Press and hold the On/Off button for at least 10  
seconds to turn the P910a off.  
www.SonyEricsson.com/support  
• Restart as normal: Press the On/Off button to  
turn on your P910a.  
• When you have installed a new language, you  
have to turn your P910a off and then on again for  
the change to take effect.  
Incorrect  
character  
appears when  
keyboard key is  
pressed  
• The wrong keyboard type can be specified in the  
control panel. Make sure the correct settings are  
defined in Control panel > Device tab > Flip  
settings > Flip keyboard  
.
184  
Troubleshooting  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use  
Please read this information before using your mobile phone.  
antennas could damage your mobile phone and may violate regulations, causing  
loss of performance and SAR levels above the recommended limits (see below).  
Note Important: to avoid hearing impairment, answer call or lower volume before  
placing this product to your ear.  
Efficient use  
Hold your mobile phone as you would any other phone. Do not cover the top of the  
phone when in use, as this affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate  
at a higher power level than needed, thus shortening talk and standby times.  
Recommendations  
• Always treat your product with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place.  
• Do not expose your product to liquid or moisture or humidity.  
• Do not expose your product to extreme high or low temperatures.  
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure and SAR  
Your mobile phone is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is turned  
on, it emits low levels of radio frequency energy (also known as radio waves or  
radio frequency fields).  
Governments around the world have adopted comprehensive international safety  
guidelines, developed by scientific organizations, e.g. ICNIRP (International  
Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) and IEEE (The Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc.), through periodic and thorough  
evaluation of scientific studies. These guidelines establish permitted levels of radio  
wave exposure for the general population. The levels include a safety margin  
designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health, and to  
account for any variations in measurements.  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the unit of measurement for the amount of radio  
frequency energy absorbed by the body when using a mobile phone. The SAR  
value is determined at the highest certified power level in laboratory conditions,  
but the actual SAR level of the mobile phone while operating can be well below  
this value. This is because the mobile phone is designed to use the minimum power  
required to reach the network.  
Variations in SAR below the radio frequency exposure guidelines do not mean that  
there are variations in safety. While there may be differences in SAR levels among  
mobile phones, all Sony Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to meet radio  
frequency exposure guidelines.  
Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and  
certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the  
government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in  
positions and locations (that is, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the  
FCC for each model. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and  
• Do not expose your product to open flames or lit tobacco  
products.  
• Do not drop, throw or try to bend your product.  
• Do not paint your product.  
• Do not use your product near medical equipment without  
requesting permission.  
• Do not use your product when in, or around aircraft, or areas posted "turn off  
two-way radio".  
• Do not use your product in an area where a potentially explosive  
atmosphere exists.  
• Do not place your product or install wireless equipment in the  
area above your car's air bag.  
• Do not attempt to disassemble your product. Only Sony Ericsson  
authorised personnel should perform service.  
Antenna  
Only use an antenna that has been specifically designed by Sony  
Ericsson for your mobile phone. Use of unauthorised or modified  
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use  
185  
         
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when the handset is positioned a minimum of  
15 mm from the body without any metal parts in the vicinity of the phone or when  
used with the original Sony Ericsson body worn accessory intended for this phone.  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure  
guidelines.  
A separate leaflet with SAR information for this mobile phone model is included  
with the material that comes with this mobile phone. This information can also be  
found, together with more information on radio frequency exposure and SAR, on:  
www.SonyEricsson.com/.  
Disposing of the Product  
Your mobile phone should not be placed in municipal waste. Please  
check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.  
Power Supply  
Connect the AC power adapter only to designated power sources as  
marked on the product. Make sure the cord is positioned so that it will not be  
subjected to damage or stress. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the unit  
from any power source before attempting to clean it. The AC power adapter must  
not be used outdoors or in damp areas. Never alter the cord or plug. If the plug will  
not fit into the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.  
Driving  
Please check if local laws and regulations restrict the use of mobile phones while  
driving or require drivers to use handsfree solutions. We recommend that you use  
only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson handsfree solutions intended for use with your  
product. Please note that because of possible interference to electronic equipment,  
some vehicle manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their vehicles  
unless a handsfree kit with an external antenna supports the installation.  
Always give full attention to driving and pull off the road and park before making  
or answering a call if driving conditions so require.  
Emergency Calls  
Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection  
under all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any mobile  
phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies).  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain  
network services and/or mobile phone features are in use. Check with your local  
service provider.  
Personal Medical Devices  
Battery Use and Care  
Mobile phones may affect the operation of cardiac pacemakers and other  
implanted equipment. Please avoid placing the mobile phone over the pacemaker,  
e.g. in your breast pocket. When using the mobile phone, place it at the ear  
opposite the pacemaker. If a minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) is kept  
between the mobile phone and the pacemaker, the risk of interference is limited. If  
you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, immediately turn  
off your mobile phone. Contact your cardiologist for more information.  
For other medical devices, please consult the manufacturer of the device.  
We recommend that you fully charge the battery before you use your mobile phone  
for the first time. The battery should only be charged in temperatures between  
+5°C (+41°F) and +45°C (+113°F).  
A new battery or one that has not been used for a long time could have reduced  
capacity the first few times it is used.  
The talk and standby times depend on the actual transmission conditions when  
using the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is used near a base station, less power  
is required and talk and standby times are prolonged.  
Warning! May explode if disposed of in fire.  
Children  
• Use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original batteries and  
chargers intended for use with your mobile phone. Other  
chargers may not charge sufficiently or may produce excessive  
heat. Using other batteries and chargers could be dangerous.  
DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO PLAY WITH YOUR MOBILE  
PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORIES. THEY COULD HURT  
THEMSELVES OR OTHERS, OR COULD ACCIDENTALLY  
DAMAGE THE MOBILE PHONE OR ACCESSORY. YOUR  
MOBILE PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORY MAY CONTAIN  
SMALL PARTS THAT COULD BE DETACHED AND CREATE A CHOKING  
HAZARD.  
• Do not expose the battery to liquid.  
186  
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
• Do not let the metal contacts on the battery touch another metal  
object. This could short-circuit and damage the battery.  
Our warranty  
Subject to the conditions of this Limited Warranty, Sony Ericsson warrants this  
Product to be free from defects in design, material and workmanship at the time of  
its original purchase by a consumer, and for a subsequent period of one (1) year.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the battery.  
• Do not expose the battery to extreme temperatures, never above  
+60°C (+140°F). For maximum battery capacity, use the battery  
in room temperature.  
What we will do  
If, during the warranty period, this Product fails to operate under normal use and  
service, due to defects in design, materials or workmanship, Sony Ericsson  
authorized distributors or service partners, in the country/region* where you  
purchased the Product, will, at their option, either repair or replace the Product in  
accordance with the terms and conditions stipulated herein.  
Sony Ericsson and its service partners reserve the right to charge a handling fee if a  
returned Product is found not to be under warranty according to the conditions  
below.  
• Turn off your mobile phone before removing the battery.  
• Keep out of children's reach.  
• Use the battery for the intended purpose only.  
• Do not allow the battery to be put into the mouth. Battery  
electrolytes may be toxic if swallowed.  
Please note that your personal settings/downloads might be lost when the Product  
is repaired or replaced.  
Disposing of the battery  
Please check local regulations for disposal of batteries or call your  
local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Center for information.  
The battery should never be placed in municipal waste. Use a  
battery disposal facility if available.  
Conditions  
1. The warranty is valid only if the original proof of purchase issued to the original  
purchaser by a dealer authorized by Sony Ericsson for this Product, specifying  
the date of purchase and serial number**, is presented with the Product to be  
repaired or replaced. Sony Ericsson reserves the right to refuse warranty  
service if this information has been removed or changed after the original  
purchase of the Product from the dealer.  
Limited warranty  
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, S-221 88 Lund, Sweden, (Sony  
Ericsson), provides this Limited Warranty for your mobile phone and original  
accessory delivered with your mobile phone (hereinafter referred to as "Product").  
Should your Product need warranty service, please return it to the dealer from  
whom it was purchased, or contact your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Center  
(national rates may apply) or visit www.SonyEricsson.com to obtain further  
information.  
2. If Sony Ericsson repairs or replaces the Product, the repaired or replaced  
Product shall be warranted for the remaining time of the original warranty  
period or for ninety (90) days from the date of repair, whichever is longer.  
Repair or replacement may involve the use of functionally equivalent  
reconditioned units. Replaced parts or components will become the property of  
Sony Ericsson.  
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use  
187  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
3. This warranty does not cover any failure of the Product due to normal wear and  
tear, or due to misuse, including but not limited to use in other than the normal  
and customary manner, in accordance with the Sony Ericsson instructions for  
use and maintenance of the Product. Nor does this warranty cover any failure  
of the Product due to accident, software or hardware modification or  
adjustment, acts of God or damage resulting from liquid.  
* European Union (EU)  
If you have purchased your Product in an EU country you can have your Product  
serviced, under the conditions set out above, within the warranty period in any EU  
country where an identical Product is sold by an authorized Sony Ericsson  
distributor. To find out if your Product is sold in the EU country you are in, please  
call the local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Center. Please observe that certain  
services may not be possible anywhere other than in the country of original  
purchase, for example due to the fact that your Product may have an interior or  
exterior which is different from equivalent models sold in other EU countries.  
It may not be possible to repair SIM-locked Products.  
4. Since the cellular system on which the Product is to operate is provided by a  
carrier independent from Sony Ericsson, Sony Ericsson will not be responsible  
for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of that system.  
5. This warranty does not cover Product failures caused by installations,  
modifications, or repair or opening of the Product performed by a non-Sony  
Ericsson authorized person.  
** In some countries/regions additional information is requested. If so, this is  
clearly shown on the valid proof of purchase.  
6. The warranty does not cover Product failures which have been caused by use of  
accessories or other peripheral devices which are not Ericsson or Sony  
Ericsson branded original accessories intended for use with the Product.  
7. Tampering with any of the seals on the Product will void the warranty.  
8. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR  
ORAL, OTHER THAN THIS PRINTED LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ERICSSON OR ITS  
LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS, TO THE FULL  
EXTENT THOSE DAMAGES CAN BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.  
Some countries/states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or  
consequential damages, or limitation of the duration of implied warranties, so the  
preceding limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.  
The warranty provided does not affect the consumer's statutory rights under  
applicable legislation in force, nor the consumer's rights against the dealer arising  
from their sales/purchase contract.  
188  
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
FCC Statement  
Declaration of Conformity  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is  
subject to the following two conditions:  
We, Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB of  
Nya Vattentornet  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation.  
S-221 88 Lund, Sweden  
declare under our sole responsibility that our product  
Sony Ericsson type FAB-1031012-BV and FAB-1031012-CN  
and in combination with our accessories, to which this declaration relates is in  
conformity with the appropriate standards 3GPP TS 51.010-1, EN 301489-7,  
EN 300328, EN 301489-17 and EN 60950, following the provisions of, Radio  
Equipment and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment directive 99/5/EC with  
requirements covering EMC directive 89/336/EEC, and Low Voltage directive 73/  
23/EEC.  
Environmental information  
•Halogenated flame retardants are not used in cabinets or the  
printed wiring board of the phone.  
Kista, June 2004  
Place & date of issue  
0682  
• Power consumption of charger during standby < 0.3W.  
For more environmental information, look at the Environmental Declaration for  
P910a at www.SonyEricsson.com  
We fulfill the requirements of the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC).  
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use  
189  
     
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Terms and definitions  
AU  
bps  
Format for audio data files .AU files have the suffix .au  
Bits per second – rate of data flow.  
Bearer  
cHTML  
Path over which data flows. Specifically in CSD and HSCSD,  
the type of phone link from the GSM network to the server –  
PSTN or ISDN.  
A version of HTML optimized for small devices.  
CLI  
Calling Line Identity. Shows the number of the person calling  
you in your mobile phone display. Your P910a will also display  
the name and photograph of the caller if they are in Contacts.  
You can then make an informed choice as to whether or not to  
take the call. Bear in mind that not all numbers can be displayed.  
To use this service, it must be supported by your network.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth wireless technology is a secure, fast radio connection  
technology. It is a computing and telecommunications industry  
specification that describes how mobile phones, computers, and  
personal digital assistants (PDAs) can easily interconnect with  
each other and with home and business phones and computers  
using a short-range wireless connection.  
COM Port  
Defines a serial/RS-232 port within the Windows environment.  
BMP  
CS  
Microsoft Windows Bitmap. A graphics format defined by  
Microsoft supporting 1, 4, 8 or 24 bit color depth. No  
compression, so files can be large.  
Circuit Switched. Connection from A to B which has a fixed  
bandwidth and is maintained over a period of time, for example  
a voice phone call.  
Bookmark  
CSD  
A URL and header/title stored in the phone, enabling the user to  
go directly to a Web or WAP page.  
Circuit Switched Data. CSD is a GSM service providing a CS  
data connection at a rate of 9.6 or 14.4kbps.  
Terms and definitions  
190  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
CSS  
GPRS  
Cascading Style Sheet. A feature of browsers.  
General Packet Radio Services. A radio technology for GSM  
networks that adds packet-switching protocols, shorter setup  
time for ISP connections, and offers the possibility of charging  
by the amount of data sent rather than by connection time.  
GPRS promises to support flexible data transmission rates  
typically up to 20 or 30 kbps (with a theoretical maximum of  
171.2 kbps), as well as continuous connection to the network.  
DTMF  
Dual Tone Multi Frequency. A method of coding digits as a  
combination of two audible tones.  
DUN  
Dial-Up Networking. The dial-up networking capability in  
Windows.  
GSM  
Global System for Mobile Communications. GSM is the world's  
most widely-used digital mobile phone system, now operating  
in over 160 countries around the world.  
EMS  
Enhanced Messaging Service. An extension of SMS enabling  
pictures, animations, sound and text formatting to be added to  
text messages.  
GSM 850  
The GSM system family includes GSM 850, GSM 900, GSM  
1800 and GSM 1900. GSM 850 refers to GSM working on a  
frequency of 850 MHz.  
FCC  
Federal Communications Commission. US government agency  
which regulates radio communications.  
GSM 1800  
GIF  
Also known as DCS 1800 or PCN, this is a GSM digital network  
working on a frequency of 1800 MHz. It is used in Europe and  
Asia-Pacific.  
Graphics Interchange Format. Format for storing images which  
also supports animated images. Highly compressed by limiting  
the color palette to 16 or 256 colors. It is one of the two most  
common file formats for graphic images on the World Wide  
Web. The other is JPEG.  
GSM 1900  
Also known as PCS. Refers to a GSM system running in the  
1900 MHz band. Used in the USA and Canada, for instance.  
191  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
HSCSD  
exchange data with other devices without a cable connection.  
IrDA requires line-of-sight transmission.  
High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data (HSCSD) is circuit-switched  
wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates of up to  
64 kbps.  
ISDN  
Integrated Services Digital Network. Communication protocol  
offered by phone companies that permits phone networks to  
carry data, voice, and other source traffic. Selecting ISDN for  
CSD/HSCSD connections provides quicker call setup.  
HTML  
Hypertext Markup Language is the set of markup symbols or  
codes inserted in a file intended for display on a World Wide  
Web browser page. The markup tells the Web browser how to  
display a Web page's words and images.  
ISP  
Internet Service Provider. An organization that provides access  
to the Internet.  
HTTP  
HyperText Transfer Protocol. The communications protocol  
used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web. Its primary  
function is to establish a connection with a Web server and  
transmit HTML pages to the client browser.  
JFIF  
JPEG File Interchange Format.  
JPEG  
Joint Photographic Experts Group, best known for the .JPG  
format for still image compression.  
IMAP4  
Internet Message Access Protocol (the latest version is IMAP4)  
is a standard client/server protocol for accessing email from  
your local server. The email is received and held for you by your  
IMAP server. You (or your client email receiver) can view just  
the heading and the sender of the letter and then decide whether  
to download the mail.  
MBM  
Multiple Bit Map. Symbian OS bitmap format.  
MeT  
Mobile Electronic Transactions. An initiative founded by  
Ericsson, Nokia and Motorola to establish a secure and  
consistent framework for mobile transactions.  
IrDA  
The Infrared Data Association is dedicated to developing  
standards for wireless, infrared transmission systems between  
devices. With IrDA ports, a device such as your P910a can  
Terms and definitions  
192  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
MIDI  
Standardization (ISO). MPEG-4 goes far beyond compression  
methods. Instead of treating the data as continuous streams,  
MPEG-4 deals with audio/video items that can be manipulated  
independently, allowing for interaction with the coded data and  
providing flexibility in editing. MPEG-4 supports a wide range  
of audio and video modes and transmission speeds.  
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a protocol  
designed for recording and playing back music on digital  
synthesizers that is supported by many makes of personal  
computer sound cards.  
MIME  
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. A protocol defining  
how messages are sent on the Internet. For example, MIME is  
used to describe how attachments are encoded and what type of  
data they contain.  
OS  
Operating System, such as Symbian OS, Linux, Microsoft  
Windows.  
OTA  
MMS  
Over The Air. A technology for transmission and reception of  
application related configuration information in a wireless  
communications system.  
Multimedia Messaging Service. Logical extension of SMS and  
EMS. MMS defines a service enabling sound, images and video  
to be combined into multimedia messages. It supports photo  
quality pictures, and sounds in WAV, MIDI, AMR, or Melodies  
format.  
PC  
Personal Computer.  
PCS  
MP3  
Personal Communications Services, often used to describe GSM  
1900 networks.  
MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3 is a standard technology and format for  
compression a sound sequence into a very small file (about one-  
twelfth the size of the original file) while almost preserving the  
original level of sound quality when it is played.  
PDA  
Personal Digital Assistant. A handheld computer having  
functions such as address book, calendar, and so on.  
MPEG-4  
The Moving Picture Experts Group, develops standards for  
digital video and digital audio compression. It operates under  
the auspices of the International Organization for  
193  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
PDF  
they communicate. Protocols exist at several levels in a  
telecommunication connection.  
Portable Document Format. A format created by Adobe for  
storing and distributing documents.  
QQVGA  
Phonebook  
Quarter Quarter VGA, 160 x 120 pixels.  
A memory in the SIM card where phone numbers can be stored  
and accessed by name or position.  
QVGA  
Quarter VGA size, typically refers to a portrait oriented screen  
240 pixels wide x 320 pixels high.  
PIM  
Personal Information Management. Generic term for  
applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and so on.  
RS232  
A standard for serial transmission between computers and  
peripheral devices  
PIN  
A PIN is a personal identification number.  
SC  
PNG  
Service Center (for SMS).  
Portable Network Graphics. Format for storing images on file  
with data compression but without lowering of quality (loss of  
information).  
Service Provider  
A company that provides services and subscriptions to mobile  
phone users.  
POP3  
SGML  
Post Office Protocol 3 is a standard client/server protocol for  
receiving email. The email is received and held for you by your  
POP server. Periodically, the P910a Messages application can  
check your mail-box on the server and download any mail.  
A generic markup language for representing documents.  
SIM  
A SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a ‘smart card’,  
inserted into GSM phones, that contains your phone account  
information. SIM cards can also be programmed to display  
Protocol  
In information technology, a protocol is the special set of rules  
that end points in a telecommunication connection use when  
Terms and definitions  
194  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
custom menus for personalized services, for instance to assist  
operators in providing mobile commerce applications.  
TLS  
Transport Layer Security. Used by Web browsers, for example.  
SMIL  
URL  
Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language. Used by MMS  
to describe how media items are to be played.  
Uniform Resource Locator. Points to a service or information on  
the Internet, for example: http://www.SonyEricsson.com  
SMS  
USB  
Short Message Service. Allows messages of up to 160  
characters to be sent and received via the network operator's  
message center to a mobile phone.  
Universal Serial Bus. A plug-and-play interface between a  
computer and add-on devices (such as audio players, joysticks,  
keyboards, phones, scanners, and printers). With USB, a new  
device can be added to your computer without having to add an  
adapter card or even having to turn the computer off.  
SMTP  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocol used to send email  
from an email client via an SMTP server.  
USSD  
Unstructured Supplementary Services Data. Narrow-band GSM  
data service. For example entering *79*1234# might return the  
stock price for stock 1234.  
SWIM  
A SWIM card is a SIM card containing a WIM.  
SyncML  
vCal; vCalendar  
SyncML is a universal protocol for data synchronization,  
developed by the SyncML Initiative Ltd.  
vCalendar defines a transport and platform-independent format  
for exchanging calendar and scheduling information for use in  
PIMs/PDAs and group schedulers. vCalendar is specified by  
IETF.  
TCP/IP  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. TCP/IP is the  
basic communication language or protocol of the Internet. It can  
also be used as a communications protocol in a private network  
(either an intranet or an extranet).  
vCard  
vCard automates the exchange of personal information typically  
found on a traditional business card, for use in applications such  
as Internet mail, voicemail, Web browsers, phone applications,  
195  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
call centers, video conferencing, PIMs /PDAs, pagers, fax,  
office equipment, and smart cards. vCard is specified by IETF.  
system and game sounds to CD-quality audio. A Wave file is  
identified by a file name extension of WAV (.wav).  
VGA  
WBXML  
Video Graphics Array. Graphics standard introduced by IBM,  
having a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels.  
Wireless Binary Extensible Markup Language.  
WIM  
VPN  
The Wireless Identity Module is a data module for electronic  
identity certificates. It can contain both trusted and client  
certificates, private keys and algorithms needed for WTLS  
handshaking, encryption, decryption, and signature generation.  
The WIM module can be placed on a SIM card, called a SWIM  
card.  
Virtual Private Network. A private network that is configured  
within a public network. A VPN appear as private national or  
international network to the customer, but physically shares a  
backbone trunk with other customers. VPNs enjoy the security  
of a private network via access control and encryption, while  
taking advantage of the economies of scale and built-in  
management facilities of large public networks. Today, there is  
tremendous interest in VPNs over the Internet, especially due to  
the constant threat of hacker attacks.  
WML  
Wireless Markup Language. A markup language used for  
authoring services, fulfilling the same purpose as HyperText  
Markup Language (HTML) does on the World Wide Web  
(WWW). In contrast to HTML, WML is designed to fit small  
handheld devices.  
WAP  
Wireless Application Protocol is a specification for a set of  
communication protocols to standardize the way that wireless  
devices, such as cellular phones and radio transceivers, can be  
used for Internet access, including email, the World Wide Web,  
and newsgroups.  
WTLS  
Wireless Transport Layer Security. Part of WAP, WTLS  
provides privacy, data integrity and authentication on transport  
layer level between two applications.  
WAV  
W3C  
A Wave file is an audio file format, created by Microsoft, that  
has become a standard PC audio file format for everything from  
The main standards body for the WWW.  
Terms and definitions  
196  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
xHTML  
Extensible Hypertext Markup Language. A reformulation of  
HTML 4.01 in XML. Being XML, means that XHTML can be  
viewed, edited, and validated with standard XML tools. At the  
same time, it operates as well as or better than HTML 4 in  
existing HTML 4 conforming user agents.  
XML  
Extensible Markup Language. An initiative from the W3C  
defining an ‘extremely simple’ dialect of SGML suitable for use  
on the WWW.  
197  
Terms and definitions  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Technical data  
General  
Screen  
Product  
Size  
P910a standard version, Latin character set  
115 x 57 x 26 mm  
Screen type  
Screen size  
TFT  
Flip closed: 208 x 208 pixels, 40 x 40 mm  
Flip open: 208 x 320 pixels, 40 x 61 mm  
Weight  
155 grams with battery and flip.  
Pixel size  
0.192 x 0.192 mm, or 132 ppi (Pixels Per Inch)  
18-bit (262 144 colors)  
System and power class GSM 850 Class 4  
GSM 1800 Class 1  
Color resolution  
Screen surface  
Illumination  
GSM 1900 Class 1  
Touch-sensitive  
Antenna  
Built in  
Variable intensity back-light  
Speech Coding  
HR, FR, EFR supported where available,  
for high speech quality.  
Third Party Application Support  
SIM Card  
Small plug-in card, 3V or 5V type  
SDKs  
C++, PersonalJava, J2ME CLDC/MIDP 2.0,  
AppForgeMicrosoft Visual Basic 6 and .NET  
Operating System  
Symbian OS v7.0 with UIQ user interface  
and applications environment  
Load formats  
C++, Java or VB applications in Symbian SIS  
format.  
MIDP installation (JAR/JAD) from Browser or  
connected PC.  
Processor  
ARM 9  
Internal User storage  
For settings, user data (for example images,  
contacts, messages) and third-party  
applications: up to 64 MB  
Security  
Support for signed applications.  
Additional storage  
Memory Stick Duo, up to 128 MB  
supported. Memory Stick PRO Duo, up to  
1 GB supported. 32 MB Memory Stick  
Duo supplied, plus adapter.  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Bluetooth compatibility  
statement  
This product is manufactured to comply  
with the Bluetooth specification 1.1.  
Operating temperature  
–15° to +55° C  
Coverage area  
Up to 10 meters (33 feet)  
Technical data  
198  
   
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Infrared transceiver  
Phone  
Data transmission rate  
Max speed between phone and IrDA  
device (that is a PC or another phone)  
SIR: up to 115,200 bps  
Personal ring Sound clips as personal ring tones and default ring  
tones -  
tone:  
supported  
formats  
MP3, AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, RMF (Beatnik)  
and WAV.  
GPRS Maximum Data Rates (kbps)  
Integrated CommuniCorder  
CS-1  
CS-2  
CS-3  
CS-4  
9.05 kbps 13.4 kbps 15.6 kbps 21.4 kbps  
Image size  
640 x 480 pixels (VGA)  
320 x 240 pixels (QVGA)  
160 x 120 pixels (QQVGA)  
176 x 144 pixels (QCIF) (video)  
4 + 1 Rx 36.2  
Tx 9.05  
53.6  
13.4  
62.4  
15.6  
85.6  
21.4  
Color depth  
24 bit (16 million colors)  
Speed achieved depends on the Coding Scheme supported by  
the GSM Network.  
Storage format  
Still pictures: JPEG/JFIF, 3 quality (compression)  
levels, user-selectable.  
Video: 3GPP/MPEG4 video with AMR sound.  
HSCSD Maximum Data Rates (kbps)  
9.6 kbps per time slot  
2 + 1 Rx 19.2  
14.4 kbps per time slot  
Pictures (Image viewer)  
28.8  
14.4  
Formats  
BMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG, MBM, PNG,  
Tx 9.6  
WBMP  
Sharing via  
Infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology, MMS  
message, email, PC file transfer, Memory Stick  
199  
Technical data  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Video player  
Security  
WTLS Class 1, 2, 3  
WTLS Cipher RC5 with key length 128  
TLS/SSL  
File Format MP4 (MPEG4), 3GP (3GPP PSS)  
Streaming  
transport  
RTSP according to 3GPP  
TLS Cipher RC4 with key length 128  
SignText  
WIM  
WIM interface including SIM-WIM (SWIM)  
15 - 120kbyte user-configurable; 30kbyte default.  
Cache  
Music player  
Content download OMA Download OTA ver 1.0  
File Format  
MP3, MP4, M4A,WAV, AAC, AU, AMR and  
G-MIDI level 1 with 24 voices polyphony, RMF,  
iMelody  
SMS  
Bearer  
GSM and GPRS  
Concatenated  
Up to 255 messages  
Integrated browser  
Markup languages HTML 3.2 (excluding features not relevant to a  
MMS  
small screen device)  
WML 1.3  
WBXML  
Image formats  
BMP, GIF (including animated), JPG, WBMP,  
PNG  
xHTML Basic  
xHTML Mobile Profile  
cHTML  
Audio formats  
Video formats  
3GPP, AMR, AU, iMelody, MIDI, MP3, RMF,  
WAV  
3GP (3GPP PSS), MP4 (receive only), Packet  
video, SDP  
WAP version  
Scripting  
2.0  
Compiled WML scripts  
WCSS  
Style sheets  
Images  
EMS  
BMP, WBMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG,  
PNG  
Supported items  
Sounds, Melodies, Pictures, Animations  
Technical data  
200  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Email  
Incoming mail server support POP3, IMAP4  
Outgoing mail server support SMTP  
Content coding  
Security  
MIME compliant  
SMTP authentication, SSL encrypted  
IMAP4 and SMTP  
Attachments  
Receiving and sending  
Document viewer and editor  
Microsoft® Word  
Microsoft® Excel  
Adobe® Acrobat® (PDF)  
Note The installed viewer for Microsoft Word documents  
cannot be used to view files in Rich Text format (.RTF)  
201  
Technical data  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Index  
A
Battery  
- charging 13  
Call list 47  
Cell information 164  
Certificate manager 166  
Chess 84  
Accented letters  
- handwriting 2, 35  
Accepted callers 54  
Accessories 24  
Add to contacts 53  
Alarm tones 146  
Alarms 120  
Call waiting 55  
Calling cards 55  
Calls  
- information 186  
- inserting 12  
- removing 12  
CommuniCorder  
- answering 42, 44  
- conference 46  
- flip closed 40  
- flip open 43  
- forwarding 54  
- incoming 44  
- international 41  
- making 40, 43  
- options 43, 45  
- preferences 52  
- rejecting 42, 44  
- restricting 55  
- retrying automatically  
44  
- settings 62  
- taking pictures 60  
- recording video clips 58  
Conference calls 46  
Connecting  
- headphone 137  
- pairing 136  
- passcodes 138  
Bookmarks 80  
Browser view 77  
Browsing the internet 76  
ALS  
- settings 57  
- support 50  
- via Bluetooth wireless  
technology 136  
Antenna 185  
AoC - Call meter settings 57  
Application shortcuts 144  
Applications  
- via infrared port 135  
- via SyncStation 134  
Connection type 172  
Connectivity software 134  
Contacts 100  
C
- flip closed 15  
- installing 131  
- overview 25  
Cable 154  
Calculator 117  
Calendar 107  
- creating entries 107  
- managing entries 108  
- preferences 109  
- sending and receiving  
entries 109  
- adding images 145  
- creating and managing  
contacts 103  
- removing 133, 170  
Area information 164  
Attachments 94  
- speed dialing 44  
- two or more 45  
- voice control 52  
Camera  
- settings 62  
Care instructions 185  
- to add a contact 102  
- to delete a contact 102  
Content and Application CD  
130  
B
Backgrounds 144, 148  
Backing up data 142  
Calibrate 148  
Call costs 57  
Control panel 147  
202  
Index  
 
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Corporate phone services 51  
- set up 56  
Entering text  
- flip closed 32  
H
- browser view 77  
- browsing 76  
Handsfree 53  
- flip keyboard 36  
- flip open 33  
- handwriting 34  
- keyboard on the screen  
34  
Handwriting recognition 34  
- accented letters 2, 35  
- extended characters 36  
- letters 2, 35  
- signing documents 80  
- user authentication  
request 80  
D
Data backup 142  
Data restore 142  
Data storage 31  
Date settings 118  
Demo application 25  
Device lock 38, 180  
Dial-Up Networking Wizard  
176  
Disk formatting 166  
Display 147  
Disposing of the battery 187  
Drawing pictures 114  
Driving 186  
Introduction to P910a 9  
IP security manager 166  
Help texts 31  
- handwriting 36  
J
Jog Dial 19  
Jotter 113  
F
Icons 21  
File manager 126  
Find 30  
First time start-up 14  
Flight mode 48  
Flip  
Image editor 65  
Image status 61  
Importing phonebook entries  
14  
Incoming call picture 52  
Incoming calls 44  
Increasing ring 150  
Indicator light 180  
Indicators 21  
Infrared 135, 155  
Inserting symbols 32  
Installing applications 131  
International calls 41  
International settings 149  
Internet 76  
- creating and editing  
notes 113  
- drawing pictures 114  
- managing notes 114  
- sending and receiving  
notes 114  
- virtual 17  
DTMF 49  
Flip closed 15  
Flip open 16  
Folders 28  
Folders in Messages 87  
Formatting disks 166  
Forwarding calls 54  
K
- turning on 43  
Key functions 117  
Key lock 39  
Keyboard  
- flip keyboard 36  
- on screen 34  
Keypad functions 20  
E
Editing  
- spreadsheets 123  
- Word documents 123  
Efficient use 185  
Email 86, 93, 161  
Emergency calls 42  
EMS 88  
G
Games 84  
L
General functions 28  
Getting help 31  
GPRS 172, 177  
- accounts 155  
- bookmarks 80  
Languages 168  
Index  
203  
Letters  
Messaging  
P910a package 10  
PC connectivity software  
134  
PC Suite for P910a 129  
Pdf documents  
- viewing 122  
Personalizing your P910a  
144  
Restoring data 142  
Restricting calls 55  
Retry to call 44  
Ring signals 145  
Ring volume 150  
- handwriting 2, 35  
Light intensity 144  
Local synchronization 139  
Locations 119  
Lock problems 179  
Locks 37  
- accounts 88, 160  
MMS 86, 163  
Mobile music 72  
Modem 175  
Multimedia messages 86, 89  
S
Music player 72  
SAR 185  
- device 38  
- key lock 39  
- SIM card 37  
Screen areas 18  
Screen saver 145  
Secure tokens 169  
Security information 167  
Self timer - picture 61  
Self timer - video 59  
Send as 30  
Sending notes 114  
Service provider 172  
Services 25  
Settings 31  
Setup Wizard 14  
Shortcuts 170  
Silent mode 48  
SIM card 12  
SIM card lock 37  
SMS 86, 88, 163  
Solitaire 85  
- importing entries 14  
Pictures 63  
M
- managing 114  
- sending and receiving  
114  
- sending and receiving  
64  
Making a call 101  
Media buffer 70, 71  
Medical Devices 186  
Memory Stick Duo 22  
- adapter 23  
- taking 60  
Numbers  
- viewing 63  
PIN 37  
PIN2 38  
- formats 120  
- handwriting 2, 35  
- formatting 166  
Messages  
PUK 37  
O
Off 14  
On 14  
Online services 128  
Options menu 16  
Owner card 106  
- accounts 88, 160  
- attachments 94  
- email 93  
- MMS 89  
- multimedia messages  
89  
Q
Quickpoint  
- viewing 122  
R
Radio Frequency 185  
Recording sounds 115  
Remote synchronization 141  
Removing applications 133  
- SMS 88  
- text messages 88  
P
Sony Ericsson Update  
Service 133  
P910a Locks 37  
P910a overview 11  
204  
Index  
This is the Internet version of the user’s guide. © Print only for private use.  
Sound files  
- loop 73  
Synchronization  
- local 139  
U
W
Uninstalling applications  
133, 170  
Wallpaper 144, 148  
WAP accounts 165  
Warranty 187  
WIM management 170  
Word documents  
- viewing 122  
-editing 123  
- managing 73  
- remote 141  
- playing 72  
Sound notification 146  
Sound recorder 115  
Sound recordings 115  
- sending and receiving  
116  
- using as ring signals  
116  
Sounds and alerts 149  
Speakerphone 47  
Speed dial  
- making a call 44  
- set-up 48  
Spreadsheets  
- editing 123  
- viewing 122  
Standby view 15  
Start-up 14  
Updating the software 133  
User greeting 152  
T
T9® text input 32  
Tasks 110  
Text input 32, 149  
Text messages 88  
Themes 144  
V
Vibrating alert 45, 48, 150  
Video 58, 67  
Video clips  
Z
- downloading 70  
- managing 68  
- playing 67  
- saving 69  
- sending and receiving  
69  
Zoom the screen 31  
Zooming 29  
Time 118  
- alarms 120  
- locations 119  
- number formats 120  
- settings 118  
- workdays 119  
Time & date settings 166  
Tone based services 49  
Touchscreen lock 39  
Transfer items with Send As  
30  
Troubleshooting 179  
TTY settings 57  
TTY support 50  
Turning on and off 14  
Video status 60  
Viewing  
- pdf documents 122  
- Quickpoint 122  
- spreadsheets 122  
- Word documents 122  
Virtual flip 17  
Voice control 52  
- making a call 41  
Voicemail 55  
Volume  
Storage Manager 183  
Storage manager 169  
Storage Wizard 183  
Storing data 31  
Streaming 69  
Symbols 32  
- changing 43  
Index  
205  

Tripp Lite U238 000 1 User Manual
Transcend Information JetFlash 101 User Manual
Toastmaster ME5CB User Manual
Tandy CHRONOMATIC 308 User Manual
Sony Xperia micro ST23i User Manual
Sony CDX L550V User Manual
Seagate ST3400832NS User Manual
Seagate BARRACUDA 18LP FC ST39175FC User Manual
Nokia N6060v User Manual
Nokia 6265 User Manual